Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. click . Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the user interface is labeled.Type: Each family can have several types. In the steps that follow. A type can also be a style. specifically its clear user interface. In the following illustration. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. This creates a new project based on the default template. A type can be a specific size of a family. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . making it easy to understand what each button represents. The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. such as a 30” X 42” title block.

You then click the command name to run the command.By default. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. click Toolbar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. In addition. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Edit. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. While working in the drawing area. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. TIP For example. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. and View.

8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the list of columns that are available. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . click Design Bars. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. click Structural Wall. click Structural Column. 9 In the Type Selector. click Beam. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the left side of the Options Bar. if you intend to add a beam. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. First. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. If you select the Beam tool. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. For example. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. Within the drawing area. 6 On the Design Bar. notice a beam type is specified. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.

click the tab. containing buttons grouped by function. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. immediately below the Type Selector. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. 11 Click OK. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box.

In the Project Browser.The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 . select Views (all).

family category (beams. The browser is also dockable. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. sheets.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. schedules. You can right-click in the browser to add. 14 On the Settings menu. reports. and groups of your current project. click Browser Organization. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 13 In the Type Selector. families. columns. and rename views.sign next to the name. 3D). families. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. walls). elevations. and group name. double-click the name. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . To open a view. and groups. delete.

15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Modify. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . In the bottom left corner of the window. click Cancel. Do not click." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. After you create a browser organization scheme.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. click Structural Wall. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. In this case.

you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. press F1 to get help on that dialog. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. in conjunction with tooltips.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Windows: From any window. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. If there is no Help button displayed. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. In the Status Bar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. 20 Press TAB. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. Click the Help button. press SHIFT+F1. After you are familiar with these tasks. There are several tools that help you find information. The Status Bar also provides information. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. find a keyword on the Index tab. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . The elevation symbol consists of two parts. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. and click to get the topic associated with the window. You can use this tri-pane. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. When you place the cursor over a component. regarding selected components within a view. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Tooltips: To see tooltips. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. click .

3 In the Project Browser. the view zooms out from the structural model. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the drawing area. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the following steps. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. In the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 .Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window. click Training Files. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. For example.rvt. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).

8 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command.6 On the View toolbar. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. To modify or add snap increments. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.

You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click the SteeringWheels tab. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click Help. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. press ESC. on the View toolbar. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . select the second item in the list. and then using the Zoom tool again. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 16 To exit the wheel. As you move the mouse. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).11 To display SteeringWheels. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. 18 On the Undo menu. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. In this example.

Some commands. On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Lines. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . or press CTRL+Z. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. and click again to end it. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Press ESC twice. on the Standard toolbar. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. such as the Lines command. 21 To end the command. click the Undo command. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line.

you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. beams. When you finish these tutorials. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will create and name a new steel project. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. and a concrete slab to the model. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. columns. 19 . Finally. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. you create a 5-story steel structure. You then add structural walls. beam systems. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. Structural Modelling In this lesson.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality.

click Level. Adding New Levels on page 20. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. click the Level 2 reference line. i_RST_EW_Modelling. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). Adding New Levels In this exercise. On the Options Bar. when a dashed line displays. and click Open.rvt. enter 12' 0". enter 12' 0".1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click (Pick Lines).rte. you create additional levels for your structure. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. and for Offset. click to create Level 3. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. select Structural Analysis-Default . Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and press ENTER. 2 In the New Project dialog. open the Imperial Templates folder.rvt. and double-click North. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ In the drawing area. click OK.

5 Press ESC. and Level 5).4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 . each with the offset value set to 12' 0". you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21.

dwg. click Training Files. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. (Zoom In). For Positioning. Notice that Level 2 is bold. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. select Auto .Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Colors.Center to Center. Select Current view only. Click Open. click symbol as shown. i_RST_EW_Modelling. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. select Black and White. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file.rvt. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan.

drag it beyond the dimensions. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. click Hide in View. and on the Options Bar. click Query. and click to place the symbol. 9 In the drawing area. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . and in the Import Instance Query dialog.5 Click the elevation symbol. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. select a single column. . and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing. click drawing.

(Undo).rvt. click . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Options Bar. click Grid. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. Notice that it is labeled 2. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding Column Grids In this exercise. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. Adding Column Grids on page 24. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. Notice that the grid line is highlighted.Notice that all columns disappear. 10 On the Toolbar.

12 Click the value within the grid bubble. As you select subsequent grid lines. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Column Grids | 25 . NOTE When you select a grid line. click . Notice that the grid line is highlighted. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. 10 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. enter A. labels display in numerical sequence. click Modify. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Grid. 11 Select the first vertical grid line.

26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. and then OK. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Click Apply.dwg file.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. click Modify. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. Under Halftone. The last grid line is labeled G. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. 19 Enter ZF. 15 On the Design Bar.

Adding Structural Walls | 27 . Adding Structural Walls on page 27. Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise. For the remainder of this tutorial.rvt. this view is referred to as the plan view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure.

6 On the View toolbar. click (3D). For the remainder of this tutorial. . 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Using the drawing as a guide. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. 8 In the Type Selector. click Structural Wall. Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view. select Finish Face: Exterior. and place the first structural wall as shown.2 On the View toolbar. click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. click . this view is referred to as the 3D view. and enter ZF. and for Loc Line.8" Masonry. select Basic Wall : Generic . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click center of the drawing.

15 On the View Control Bar. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . 13 On the Design Bar. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges.12 Using the same method. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. click Modify.

Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls. place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and using the architectural drawing as a guide.

19 On the Toolbar. (Mirror). click 20 Click grid D. Adding Structural Walls | 31 . The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side.

32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. Adding Structural Columns on page 32.21 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view. click Modify. you add columns at specific grid intersections.

i_RST_EW_Modelling. Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. . click Structural Column. 6 Using the same method. click structure. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View toolbar.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5.rvt. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 .

9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. and enter ZF. 10 In the Type Selector. click (Grid Intersection). 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines.7 On the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Columns are placed at each grid intersection. click Modify. click Finish. 14 Click inside the 3D view. 13 On the Toolbar. click Structural Column. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. 11 On the Options Bar. and enter ZF.

. Adding Structural Beams | 35 .15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 On the Options Bar. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 4 In the Type Selector. click Chain. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Beam. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click structure. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. Adding Structural Beams on page 35. 2 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure.

and then click to enter the beam startpoint. 8 Using the same method. enter 5' 0". 10 Click the column at grid location A6. and A6. press CTRL. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . A5.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. that is. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. and press ENTER. and select the beam between A6 and A5.

Adding Structural Beams | 37 . 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. click . 15 On the Options Bar. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. This project does not require sloped beams. 14 In the Type Selector. click Beam. 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines.Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. and enter ZF. NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. 11 On the Toolbar. click .

18 Click inside the 3D view. 20 Click inside the plan view. and enter ZF. and press DELETE. . Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. click through A5. click Modify.17 On the Options Bar. Beams are placed within the grid. click Finish. 19 On the Design Bar. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 21 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam.

click . 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. 24 Click inside the plan view.23 Using the same method. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Adding Structural Beams | 39 . 25 On the View toolbar. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. between grid lines G2 and G5. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. click Beam. 27 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

30 Using the same method. place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

click . and on the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. click . 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. and press DELETE.31 Select the 3 new beams. Adding Structural Beams | 41 . 34 On the View toolbar.

and enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft. click . and press DELETE. 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 38 Click inside the 3D view.36 On the View toolbar.

44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click center of the structure. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. This is the startpoint for the first beam. This is the endpoint for the first beam. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . 40 On the View toolbar. click Beam. 39 Click inside the plan view. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. 42 In the Type Selector.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. .

47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. This is the endpoint for the third beam.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. click . and on the Toolbar. This is the endpoint for the second beam. 46 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 48 Click the beam on grid line D . 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. 51 Click inside the 3D view.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise. Adding Structural Beams | 45 .

do the following: Click Check None. For z-Direction Offset Value. enter -0' 5". Click OK. Click Apply. 54 In the Filter dialog. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Under Category.53 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. select Structural Framing (Joist). select Other. do the following: For z-Direction Justification. Under Category. select Structural Framing (Girder). click ■ ■ ■ . Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. under Constraints. 55 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 56 In the Element Properties dialog.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. enter 9' 0". click Beam System. 3 On the Options Bar. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view. and enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. 5 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. Under Pattern.rvt. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . click of the structure. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. For Beam Type. i_RST_EW_Modelling. For Maximum Spacing. Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. for Layout Rule. select Maximum Spacing. select 3D. .

place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. and enter ZF. click Modify. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. 8 Using the same settings and method. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. 7 Click to place the beam system. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Click inside the 3D view. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. Also. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

12 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Design Bar. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. and enter ZF. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view.rvt. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Slab. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. You are now in sketch mode. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click Lines. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49.

zoom in and out as needed. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing.4 On the View toolbar. and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. click structure. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. If necessary. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. When sketching the slab. .

Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines. 11 On the Toolbar. click .Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF.

16 On the Design Bar. click line D. Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar. 14 Enter ZF.13 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. click Modify. click Lines. . 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. 22 On the View toolbar. click Lines. click Lines. click structure. click grid line D. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 19 On the Design Bar.18 On the View toolbar. . and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 23 On the Design Bar. 21 Enter ZF.

27 On the View toolbar.25 On the Design Bar. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Finish Sketch. click Modify. 26 Enter ZF. 31 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF. 28 On the Design Bar. click structure. . click Lines.

Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 . beams. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you copy columns.rvt.In the Revit dialog. beam systems. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55.

select Walls. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). do the following: Click Check None. do the following: For Top Constraint. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . under Constraints. and then click OK. select Up to level: Level 5. Under Category. 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK.Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. and enter ZF. . Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. 5 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 On the Options Bar.

select Structural Columns. click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. do the following: For Top Level. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. do the following: Click Check None. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. and draw a selection box around the entire view. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. enter 4' 0". Under Category. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Filter dialog. Click Apply. Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. under Constraints. For Top Offset.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . and then click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. . select Level 3. and then click OK. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. select Level 5.

24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . do the following: For Base Offset. enter 0' 0'. click Modify. Structural Framing (Girder). 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and then click OK. and then click OK. do the following: Click Check None. while pressing CTRL. For Top Offset. 20 In the Filter dialog. under Constraints. enter 4' 0". 23 In the Select Levels dialog. select Floors. and draw a selection box around the entire structure. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. select Level 3 and Level 5. Structural Beam Systems. click ■ ■ . click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. and Structural Framing (Joist). 16 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. on the Options Bar. Under Category.

25 On the Design Bar. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Foundations In this exercise.rvt. under Structural Plans. 2 Enter ZF. i_RST_EW_Modelling. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Foundations | 59 . click Modify. Adding Foundations on page 59. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1.

The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 5 On the Options Bar. All the structural columns are highlighted. 8 On the Design Bar. click . Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. click Finish. click Modify. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". click (Structural Column). 4 In the Type Selector. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. 7 On the Toolbar.

click Foundation ➤ Slab. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding Foundations | 61 . 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. click 19 Enter ZF. click Floor Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. click (Rectangle). The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. click Finish Sketch. 18 On the View toolbar.10 Select both footings. and press DELETE. (3D). and click OK. select 12" Foundation Slab. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. You are now in sketch mode. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.

you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. and modify its line properties. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. Next. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. Structural Detailing In this lesson. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. Finally. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow. you place it in an existing project sheet.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Structural Detailing on page 62.

You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. Click OK. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog.dwg. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . do the following: ■ Select the Link option. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0". but do not open it. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. ■ Click Save As.rvt.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise.

For Positioning. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing.■ ■ For Colors. 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights. ■ Click Open. select Auto . This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial.rvt. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. select Black and White. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65.Center to Center.

i_RST_EW_Detailing. Notice that Level 1 is bold. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . you create a section that references an existing detail view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 2 On the View toolbar. From the adjacent drop-down list of views. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. click . click Section. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection.rvt.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. Select the Reference other view option. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3.

1. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. and double-click S. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. and click inside the north wall to place the section. expand select Sheets (all).Unnamed. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows).rvt. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet. move the cursor down.

and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view. click Level 1 on the sheet. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 6 Release the mouse button.Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area.Sheet S-1 . 4 On the View toolbar. .

68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 8 Click to place the detail.Notice the detail drawing outline. 7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet.

Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 . and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. . and click ENTER.In the structural plan view of Level 1. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. change it to S-1. click corner of the sheet.0.

you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise.rvt. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .In the structural plan view of Level 1. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . and double-click Typical Wall Section. click . 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 2 Click on the detail drawing.

5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. select 4. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Weight. notice the Layer value CONT5. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 12 Click OK. 6 Click OK. 13 Click Apply. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. 9 Click the CONT5 row. 14 Click OK.

you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet.Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 .rvt. click Training Files. select Show all views and sheets.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library.TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73.TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . i_RST_EW_Detailing.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 . Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 . 3 In the Insert Views dialog.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 . do the following: ■ ■ For Views. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.

12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. 9 Release the mouse button. Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. click OK. 11 Click to place the detail. 7 Click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. and drag 001 .

and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75.S. click . Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans.T. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 3 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.. and close all other views. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . i_RST_EW_Detailing.O. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. click Detail Component. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise. as shown.Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector.

Adding Detail Components | 93 . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Move). 26 On the Toolbar. click Modify. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. as shown.24 Click to place the bolt.

28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . as shown.

29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle. Adding Detail Components | 95 .

32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection. click Detail Component.Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Selector. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16.

39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. and then click the lock for the alignment. 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. click Modify. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. as shown. click 38 Click OK. as shown. Adding Detail Components | 97 . 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. .33 Click to place the L-angle. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Select the L-angle. click (Align). 36 On the Options Bar.

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise. you will add break lines and annotation to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF.rvt. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . below the structural angle and expansion bolt. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. as shown. The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. as shown. as shown. 5 Click to place the break line. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. select Break Line.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. to the right of the coping detail. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. 8 Click to place the break line.

Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line. click Modify.10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click to place the break line. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line.

15 On the View Control Bar. Click to finish the second leader segment. away from the text box. click Text. as shown. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. 18 Click in the drawing area. ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . 17 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). Click to finish the first leader segment. Move the cursor to the right. Move the cursor up and to the right. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region).

Click to finish the first leader segment. 23 On the Options Bar. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. Click to finish the second leader segment. 22 Click on the leader. 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Move the cursor to the right. as shown. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN).19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. click (Add Left Leader). click Modify.

as shown.24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam. 25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 .

Move the cursor to the left. ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. EXPANSION ANCHORS. away from the text box. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 Click in the drawing area. Click to finish the first leader segment. click Text. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). 27 On the Options Bar. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. Click to finish the second leader segment. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. away from the text box. Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. Click to finish the leader segment. Move the cursor down and to the right. (One Segment). click Text.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. Move the cursor to the right. 31 On the Options Bar. 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. INFO). as shown. click 32 On the Options Bar. 33 Click in the drawing area.C. SECTIONS FOR REINF.

35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 . as shown.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box.

106 .

which is independent of the project settings. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. 9 In the New Project dialog. they are not saved to project or template files. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. you create an office template. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. 7 In the New Project dialog. In the first lesson. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and your username when using worksets. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. select Invert background color. click OK. 4 In the Options dialog. and set it as your default template. click Training Files. you modify the system environment. 5 Under Colors. journal cleanup options. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. These settings control the graphics. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. In the second lesson.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. Notice that the drawing area is black. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click OK. 107 . click the Graphics tab. click Browse. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. under Template file. selection default options.rte. Finally. notification preferences.

select One hour. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. click Structural Wall. click Training Files. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Under Notifications. 19 On the Design Bar. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. click the value for Selection Color. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 20 On the Design Bar. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. and select the wall. For Tooltip Assistance. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. 13 In the Color dialog. select yellow. 14 Click the General tab. select One hour. click Modify. When an error occurs. 24 When prompted to save. 16 Click OK. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. 11 In the Options dialog. click Modify. select None. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. click No. 12 Under Colors. and click OK.rvt. click the Graphics tab. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. the elements causing the error display using this color.

the family libraries. and the family template files. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. If prompted. For Selection Color. and click Browse to select a template. Your login name displays by default. 2 In the Options dialog. as well as the material and rendering libraries. 28 In the Options dialog. you specify your default file locations. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Browse. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. under Default path for family template files. Specifying File Locations on page 109. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 Under Default template file. ■ ■ 30 Click OK.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. you can start a new project with that template. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. click Browse. Under Journal File Cleanup. select Red. TIP To view a template. 5 Under Default path for user files. Specifying File Locations | 109 . select the folder to save your files to by default. click the File Locations tab. 7 In the Options dialog. These files are used primarily in the software support process. click Browse. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. 4 Click Cancel. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Under Windows Username. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. clear Invert background color. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. do not save the changes. and click Open. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications.

Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. In the following illustration. 8 Click Cancel. or loading a Revit Structure file. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. such as in a large. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. click (Add Value). 10 Under Libraries. However. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Place. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and click on the right-side of the field. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and change the name to My Library. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .This path is set automatically during the installation process. centralized. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. You can modify the existing library names and path. NOTE When you are opening. and notice the list of library names. and you can create new libraries. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. saving. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation.

templates. 14 Under Library Name. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click the My Library icon. 20 Click the File Locations tab. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select it as the library path. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Load. and click Open. click My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 18 Click Cancel. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. select My Library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying File Locations | 111 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. Save. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. 21 Under Libraries. and click OK. or families.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. If you work in a large office. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. and Import dialogs.

to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If prompted. 17 Click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Click File menu ➤ Save. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. click OK. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Edit. 14 Click in the drawing area. click template. click the Spelling tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 8 Under Building industry dictionary.23 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 Under Settings. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. 12 On the Standard toolbar. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 3 Under Settings. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Restore Defaults. click Modify. click the Spelling tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 5 In the text editor. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK. do not save the changes. Click File menu ➤ Exit. 23 In the Options dialog. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 4 Under Personal dictionary. click Edit. click Text. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 11 In the Options dialog. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 19 In the Options dialog. click Edit. 9 In the text editor. 22 In the text editor. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and enter 1. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. under Template file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'.. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. You can turn snap settings on and off. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . 2 In the New Project dialog. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. work with snapping turned off. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. 4 In the New Project dialog. 8 In the Snaps dialog. click Structural Wall. In this exercise. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. click OK. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. As you zoom in and out within a view.rte. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK.25 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Under Object Snaps. click Browse. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. you modify snap increments. click Training Files. you modify snap settings. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. For example. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel button. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. and move the cursor to the right. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. While sketching. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. This is the increment that you added previously. zoom out until it does so. click Modify. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. use the wheel button on your mouse. Do not set the wall end point. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. If it does not. and click Wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. annotations. 3 Click (Duplicate). In the left pane of the Open dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. Using these options. Finally. the midpoint. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. When you apply a material to a component. and do not save the file. Modifying Project Settings on page 115. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. If you move the cursor along the wall.rvt. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and object styles. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and the wall edges. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . 2 Scroll down. When a model component is loaded into a project. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 20 Move the cursor downward. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 17 Enter SM. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. lines. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. it will snap to the endpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. You create and modify materials. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and use it to complete the exercises. click Training Files. and specify the wall endpoint. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. 23 Click OK. 22 Under Dimension Snaps.. and select Concrete . 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and delete the value 1". fill patterns.Precast Concrete for Name. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. save the project file with a unique name.

6 Select the lower exterior wall. 8 Click Duplicate. and click . 13 In the Materials dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times. and select the remaining exterior walls. 15 Select the left foundation wall. Fnd. 17 In the Type Selector. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. and double-click T. select Concrete-Precast for Name. and click OK.Precast. and click OK. 9 Enter Foundation .Custom for the new wall name. enter Concrete . . Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Wall. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. click Edit. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .O. click Edit/New. In the steps that follow. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. click This is the material you created previously. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 10 In the Value field for Structure. 16 Press CTRL. 12 On the right side of the Material field. and click OK.

select Best. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. 22 In the Rendering dialog. and select Rendering.19 On the View Toolbar. 21 In the drawing area. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. the material that you created is displayed. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. When it is finished. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. right-click the Design Bar. Click Render. click Rendering dialog. zoom into the model. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. click . The rendering process begins. In the following exercise.

Drafting pattern density is fixed.23 On the Rendering dialog. 3 Under Pattern Type. i_Settings-in progress. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall.rvt. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. such as steel. expand Elevations. under Display. click Custom. rotate. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. 5 Click New. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. click Import. and move model patterns. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. You can align. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 7 Under Custom. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click West. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. choose Model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. click Show Model. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building.

click 20 Under Surface Pattern.pat from the Common folder. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 26 On the View Toolbar. and click OK. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. 24 Click OK 3 times.TIP Typically. to select a fill pattern. 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. click Modify. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. click . The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Under Custom. TIP If the pattern does not display. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. 15 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. and click Open. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . and click OK. click Edit. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. click . click . 25 On the Design Bar. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. click OK. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. 23 In the Materials dialog. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. under Pattern Type. select Model. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. . click in the Material field for Layer 2. 14 Select the wall. 12 Click OK. 17 In the Value field for Structure.

Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D. there are often multiple trusses within a project.28 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. i_Settings-in progress. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. For example. 2 On the keyboard. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

click Model Graphics Style. under Custom Colors. expand Walls. double-click the Line Color field. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. 5 In the Object Styles dialog. and click Hidden Line. click Show categories from all disciplines. and click OK. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Blue. 8 In the Color dialog. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. 7 Under the Walls category. 6 Under Category. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles | 121 .3 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Object Styles dialog.

You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. and click Hidden Line. You have created a new line pattern. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Wall. click New. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. (example: plan view). You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. Under Line Pattern. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . i_Settings-in progress. under Floor Plans. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. double-click T. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Fnd. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. Click OK. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. now you must apply it.O. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. enter Truss for Name.rvt. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 8 On the View Control Bar. select Truss. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. click Model Graphics Style. expand Structural Framing. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and select Web Joist.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . and select Web Joist for Visibility. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 15 Click OK twice. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view. Select Truss for Line Pattern. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. expand Structural Framing. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Select Blue for Line Color.

specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . select Underslab Drainage. click Lines. 22 In the Type Selector. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . Enter 2' 0" for Offset. . Select Red for Line Color. under Modify Subcategories. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. Slab. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. 25 In the Options Bar. equally spaced as shown below. 26 Draw 3 vertical lines.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection. 23 In the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Click OK. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name.O. and click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Click . 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. double-click T. click New. 18 In the Line Styles dialog.

Imperial for name. 30 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Annotations on page 125. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 34 Click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. expand Lines. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 33 On the Model Categories tab. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click Duplicate. expand Lines. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1. Modifying Annotations | 125 . Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view. and clear Underslab Drainage. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Under Text. i_Settings-in progress. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. and clear Underslab Drainage. and click OK. click . 29 On the Model Categories tab. click the default value for Units Format.rvt. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 4 Enter Linear .27 On the View Toolbar.

22 On the View Toolbar. 7 Click OK twice. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. notice that there is a Linear . 21 Under Leader. Structural Framing Tag. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. click Training Files. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa. the other displays the instance value.O. 15 Under Loaded Tags. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. . click Structural Framing Tag. click Modify. verify that Create is clear. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. under Floor Plans. 18 Click a beam. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Tags dialog.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Imperial dimension available. In the Type Selector. You have created a new dimension style. Wall. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 12 Click Load. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag ➤ By Category. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. Under Category. Fnd. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click OK. double-click T. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

24 Proceed to the next exercise. Specifying Units of Measurement. you modify the detail level assignments. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. click . you specify the project units of measurement . select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. In the first section. and click OK. 6 Click OK. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. 4 In the Project Units dialog. under Length. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. and click OK. select Openings. select SF for Unit suffix. Specifying Units of Measurement.rvt. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. In this table. dimension values display using this setting. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. 5 In the Format dialog.Temporary Dimensions.Temporary Dimensions. Temporary Dimensions. In the second section. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. dimensions use these project settings. click the default value for Format. Unless there is an override. 8 Under Walls. click the default value for Format. under Area.unless there is an override. you modify the temporary dimension settings. You do not select a view scale to move it. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. In this project. 12 Click OK. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. i_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Format dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. In the final section. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. and Detail Level Options | 127 . 2 In the Project Units dialog. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. and Detail Level Options on page 127.

In this exercise. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. and double-click Completed Project.rvt. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE In this exercise. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. expand Sheets (all).13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .Phase 1-Structure East Wing . In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.

expand each sheet set. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 21 In the Project Browser. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 8 Select Phase. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. and click OK.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. under Sheets. click the Folders tab. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . 13 Select Sheet Prefix. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. 14 In the Project Browser. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and click OK. select Discipline. and click New. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 5 On the Views tab. select Type/Discipline. and click Apply. notice that views are grouped based on phase. On the Project Browser. and click OK. In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand each view type. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 16 Click the Views tab. under Views. and click OK. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 6 In the Project Browser.

6 In the Project Browser. enter a unique file name. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. If you want to save this file. and click Open. For example. and double-click Building Elevation. when you create a new project. 5 Click OK. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you select the starting point for your structural template. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. In the lesson that follows. click Browse. If your work requires a variety of templates. you create an office template. When you create new projects. Type. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. named print settings.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. expand Views ➤ Elevations. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. dimensions styles. In this lesson. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and rendered scenes in a template. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. and click OK. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. levels. such as structural or construction. the same rules apply. When you create a new template based on an existing template. 2 Under Template File. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. select Project for Create new. Depending on your needs. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. Other than the default template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. navigate to your preferred directory. You can also save these settings in a template file. and Discipline. 4 In the New Project dialog. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project.rte template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and view names. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Whenever you create a new project or template. preloaded families. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template.

Other templates. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. click Browse. 12 Select a default template. 13 Click Open. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. When you create the material. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. weights. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. in the drawing area. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. For example. If you want to use a template other than the default. and click OK. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. If you have additional projects open. 11 Under Template File. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. you can select it now. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. close them. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. select Project Template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. 14 Under Create New. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. such as the structural template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you modify the project settings for your new template. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects.

The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. one for perspective model line styles. 7 Click OK when finished. 11 If necessary. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Modifying System Settings on page 107. and one for annotation symbol line styles. create new subcategories. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. rotate. In the dialog. or modify existing patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. see the previous lesson. and create new subcategories as needed. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. line colors. specific modifications are not dictated. You can add and delete view scales. 13 Modify categories. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. For more details on modifying these settings. Observe the materials that are already defined. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the Object Styles dialog. line patterns. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and scroll through the list of categories. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. You can align. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. and move model patterns. you can set line weights. create and modify them as needed. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view.During this exercise. or refer to the Help documentation. 2 Scroll down the Name list. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed.

35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. click Duplicate. select it from this list. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and radial dimensions are modified separately. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. To see the details of a particular style. and specify the properties. 23 Click OK. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. select it from this list. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 28 Click OK. 38 Click OK. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. and click Edit. or line pattern as needed. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. and specify the properties. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . angular. tags. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. To see the details of a particular style. 30 For existing line categories. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 26 To modify a line pattern. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. select it. and dimensions. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. such as section lines and dimension lines. 32 Click OK. 31 If necessary. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. name the style. modify the line weight. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. name the style. click Duplicate. line color. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. Linear.

Using the arrows between the columns. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 59 Under Doors and Windows. Medium. click Load. 62 Review the table. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 60 Click OK. When you create a new view. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 55 Specify the Slope option. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. or Fine. Volume. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. For example. and move view scales as needed. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and choose a decimal symbol. TIP In the drawing area. click Format. In the Tags dialog. 48 To load new annotation tags. 58 Under Walls. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 53 Click OK. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table.44 Click OK. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. The detail level is based on view scale. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. and Angle settings. 56 Click OK. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and click OK. 51 Under Length.

For example. Rename. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. or Edit existing organization types. 67 If necessary. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. create new browser organization types. click Edit/New. create new browser organization types. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . and select Properties. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. or Edit existing organization types. 69 Delete. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. 70 If necessary. click View Direction. click the arrows between columns. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. 71 Click OK. click the Views tab. In a typical project. 68 Click the Sheets tab. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. In certain projects. 66 Delete. To move the view scales. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 63 Click OK. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. Rename. or from the roof looking down (down direction).

136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . This could be useful for things such as title blocks. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. However. and make modifications in each area as necessary. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. You can find additional information in Help. Each command is available on the Settings menu. Use the table below as a checklist. If necessary. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. and framing tags. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. For example. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Links to associated tutorials are provided. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. In such a case. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views.

select it. However. 2 In the Type Selector. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you do both. Depending on the intended use of this template. or load a new beam type. In the steps that follow. Obviously. and column symbols. select Load. create. brace symbols. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Click Duplicate. you may want to delete. You can load any family or group into a template. If necessary. Make modifications. and click Open. Modify type properties. For example. notice the list of beams is already loaded. Although this is possible. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. and beams. For example. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. Although the options are endless. select Edit/New. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . and click OK. click on the Options Bar. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. In the Element Properties dialog. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. titleblocks. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. In addition. select Edit/New. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. click Beam. if you loaded every beam type you could find. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. In the Element Properties dialog. modify. there are some important thoughts to consider. and click OK. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. or add to this selection. you can move onto the next component type. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. If this selection is satisfactory. 3 To modify. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you could load detail components. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. enter a name. do so before starting this exercise. and click OK. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive.

You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. click Load. 12 Click OK. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.) 9 Expand the titleblock. To do so. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that each family category is listed. 11 To load a titleblock. load. and click Delete. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Press ESC twice to return to the template. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. create. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. click Preview.4 Click OK. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and select the titleblock type. right-click the component. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. This titleblock is currently part of the template. expand Families.

you can apply a view template to any view. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. In this exercise. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . and double-click Level 1. At any time. rename or duplicate the view template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. right-click. 3 Specify each value as needed. In addition. View Range. you save time and increase consistency. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. select the view. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Discipline. you will first modify view templates. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. 4 If necessary. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. In this exercise. 2 For Name. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. you create the views required for your template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. select Structural Framing Plan. Detail Level. you created new projects using different templates.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and select Apply View Template. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. and make modifications. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 6 Click OK.

open the view from the Project Browser. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. 17 In the Project Browser. Rename. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 18 In the Project Browser. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. 28 Rename the 3D View. click Apply. and apply the appropriate template. 19 In the Project Browser. select Make Plan View. 20 To add additional levels to the template. right-click {3D}. click 26 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. duplicate. under Structural Plans. review the Structural plans and elevations. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. and select Rename. if desired. under Elevations. If necessary. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 24 Create additional levels as needed. or delete this view. select the view in the Project Browser. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. expand 3D Views. You can also duplicate or delete the view. Black levels have no associated views. under Floor Plans. double-click Building Elevation. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. To do so. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under 3D Views. 11 Click Apply. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. duplicate.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 21 In the Options Bar. 15 If you modified any other view templates. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. review the existing floor plans. and click OK. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. on the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. 27 In the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. After the template is applied. You can rename this view. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. and click OK. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser.

34 If you want to add schedules to your template. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. on the View toolbar. You may want to add schedules to a template. and click OK. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. assign filters. select the category type. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. Save the view 32 To save the view. modify settings. and modify their properties accordingly.29 To create additional 3D views. select and order required fields. On the Filter tab. click Schedule/Quantities. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. click . supply a view name. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Using this dialog. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. click . This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often.

modify settings. and click OK.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. To do so. or on the sheet itself. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. select the default titleblock. On the Appearance tab. click Sheet. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. 36 Click OK. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Create new sheets as needed. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. and modify their properties accordingly. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. select the titleblock and delete it. select one. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. You can still add views to the sheet. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. double-click the sheet number. and click Rename. and click OK. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. and columns. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. After the sheet is created. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. modify settings. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. beams. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. You are prompted to select a titleblock. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template.

and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs.3 Under General. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 . ■ 5 Click OK. When you import a DWG or DXF file.txt). each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers.

and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. When you save these mappings to a text file. 5 For each category. When you import a DWG or DXF file. They cannot be shared with other projects. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory.2 For each category.16). When scheduling. and so on. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. and so on. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. 9 Click Save As. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. name the file. for example. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. therefore. name the file. click Save As. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. click Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. windows. Using shared parameters. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. and click Save. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and related multi-category tags and schedules. 8 In the dialog. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. name the file. project parameters.txt) for MicroStation. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. they become the set mappings for the project. These settings are retained within the project template. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and click Save. When you create a multi-category schedule. they cannot be used to tag objects. doors. For example. and unlike shared parameters. you normally schedule a single category: rooms.

you may want to save the file to a network location. 3 Name and save the file. you can begin creating parameter groups. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. select a parameter value type. 21 Click OK. 22 Add project parameters as needed. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . 11 For each parameter group. under Groups. 8 Under Parameters. and select a shared parameter. 5 Enter the group name. 2 Click Create. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. and select Shared Parameter. Creating Named Print Settings. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 27 Click OK. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. select a parameter discipline type. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. enter a parameter name. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 7 Under Parameter group.In this exercise. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. click New. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select Project parameter. 25 Click OK. This allows you to name the external parameter file. If a file already exists. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. click New. select a group to which you want to add parameters. add required parameters. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. and specify the Type. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. and click OK. 18 Under Type. 24 Click Select. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 16 Under Name. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 14 Click Add. For each parameter group. and click OK when finished. After the file is named. click Add. you can create a list of parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 10 Click OK. 9 Name the parameter. 17 Under Discipline.

37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. you create named print settings. enter a name for the schedule. By creating named settings within the template. and click OK. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. click OK. The tag is now part of the template. 36 When you have completed the schedule. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. and click Open. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. 2 Under Name. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. For each printer. make minor modifications if necessary. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. you can load them into the template. you need only select a setting. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. select the tag. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. 34 Under Name. and print. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.For information on creating multi-category tags. and add them to your default template file. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . paper placement. or consult the Help documentation. and the percent of actual size.

click New. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 5 In the New dialog. 6 Modify the printer settings. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 . and create additional settings as needed.3 Under Settings. 4 Click Save As. click Setup.

TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. In addition. and click Open. By investing the time to individualize your template. 14 Under Save as type. you modified settings. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 17 Select Browse. click Browse. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 19 Click OK. click Setup. 11 Click OK when finished. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use the template 16 To use the template. loaded components. 22 Next to Default template file. In this lesson. and create new settings for this printer. 21 Click the File Locations tab. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Template Files (*. select a different printer. 18 Select the template. 23 Navigate to the template location. and click Open.9 In the Print dialog. You can also set this template as your default template. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. select it. and save it as a template file. 24 Click OK. and saved them to a template. and click Save. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. The only remaining task is to save it. This can provide a good starting point for a template.rte). 15 Name the template. you should save it to a network path. If you need to share this file with others. Your template is complete.

Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. AutoCAD Architecture. Notice that Level 2 is bold. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. and Revit Architecture. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE For training purposes. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. 149 .dwg. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. click Training Files. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.

copy. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. Click Open. Exterior facade outlines. click the imported/linked file. select Auto .NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. paste. For Positioning. 6 On the Options toolbar. drag. click drawing area. ■ ■ ■ For Colors. and rotate the view as one object. 5 In the drawing area. select Black and White. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. However. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model.Center to Center. stairs and elevator opening symbols. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .

Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. select Export to AutoCAD. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns.dwg. You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is supplied. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the Xref Manager dialog. select the Imported Categories tab. 1 In the Project Browser. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE For training purposes. click Training Files. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. click Training Files. and click OK.dwg. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. and expand Structural Plans. expand Views (all). In the next tutorial. and select the latest available format. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog.rvt. Notice that Level 2 is bold. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the File menu. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background. In the next tutorial.

8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. Click Open. click the Imported Categories tab.Origin to Origin. 5 In the drawing area. Exterior facade outlines.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. click Revit Structure drawing area. For Positioning. select Invert. stairs. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 6 On the Options toolbar. click the imported/linked file. select Auto . 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and elevator opening symbols.

click Partial Explode. click the linked file. Click OK. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. click . 13 Select any column. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . and click OK. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT. and on the Option Bar.dwg. 10 On the View toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ . 11 In the drawing area. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. 12 On the Options toolbar.

16 Click File menu ➤ Close. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. You can save the open file if desired. columns. levels. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. select Auto . You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers.Notice the column adjusts to the change. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. select Project under Create New. You can copy grids. 6 Click Open. a new training file is supplied. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click OK.Origin to Origin. for Positioning. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. select a template file. Notice that Level 2 is bold.rvt. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. click Training Files. walls. 5 In the Add Link dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. In the next tutorial.

11 Click the imported Revit drawing. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. click the linked file. 8 In the drawing area. click Revit Structure drawing area. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 9 On the Options toolbar. stairs and elevator opening symbols. click Options.Exterior facade outlines. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. 7 Enter ZF.

and Floors). On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. Therefore. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. To select more than one grid. under Structural Plans. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. select Split Columns by Levels. make selections. 14 In the Columns dialog. Also.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. and while pressing CTRL. When finished. select Level 2. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. under Additional Copy Parameters. Grids. columns need to be split at each level. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. click Copy. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Walls. click the Columns tab. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. Columns.

NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. The warning can be ignored. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . click OK. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click OK. double-click Building Elevation. After you select the grid. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. To select more than one level. under Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. and that the type from the new project will be used. and select each level. press CTRL. click Copy. and that the type from the new project will be used.

NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. floors. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click . 25 On the Design bar. To select more than one element. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . and that the type from the new project will be used. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. and on the Options Bar. and select each element. click OK. After selecting each element. click Copy. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. The warning can be ignored. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. press CTRL. The warning can be ignored. under Structural Plans. select Level 1. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. Copy structural walls.After you select each level. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. click Finish Mode.

check the value for Structural. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. The linked Revit file is displayed. columns.27 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. and click OK. ■ Select Overlay. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. Click OK. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. and click OK. click the Revit tab. and on the Option Bar. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and floors. click Reference Type. select Bearing for Structural Usage. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. click . the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog.

34 Proceed to the next tutorial. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is supplied. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . In the next tutorial. Project Coordination on page 461.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. In a later tutorial.

You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels.Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. 161 . After you copy columns. Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. and then copy this framing to other levels. You also learn how to splice the columns.

5 Click the value in the grid head. click . 1 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. 3 On the Options Bar. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. click Grid. the imported drawing is a halftone. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and enter A. . click structural model.Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. 4 Select the left vertical grid line.

The last vertical grid is K. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. 8 When you get to grid I. 9 On the View toolbar. change the value to J. Notice it is labeled B. Zoom in and out as needed. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. Notice it is grid L.As you select subsequent grid lines. . click structural model. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line.

17 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. click . 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. click Modify.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. and enter 1 for the new value. 16 On the View toolbar. Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). The bottom grid should be grid 5. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click . and draw a zoom box around the atrium. click Grid. Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric.

20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 . 21 Click the column to set the arc radius.

166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown.22 On the Design Bar. and select the grid. 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown. click Modify.

Adding Structural Columns | 167 . click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. To save changes. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection.

click . click Structural Column. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. click Finish.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. and click Modelling. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. 4 In the Options Bar. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33.

16 Use the same method to create Level 4. Click OK. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. K4 A5.7 Press ESC. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. B5. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". In addition. J2. K5 K3. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Level. J1. K2 G5. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. 15 On the left side of the elevation. and double-click South Elevation. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. and press DELETE. H1. 8 Select the columns listed below. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. H5. J5. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . click ■ ■ ■ . 17 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. click Modify. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). K1 G2. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. 12 On the Design Bar. H2. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. click Modify. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. which are outside of the structure footprint. NOTE If necessary. Notice the new level is named Level 3.

27 In the Select Levels dialog. select Structural Columns. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Filter dialog. click Modify. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Check None. 28 On the Design Bar. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. and click OK. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. select Level 3 and Level 4. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 29 In the Project Browser. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click . and click OK. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click South Elevation. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As. under Structural Plans. To save changes. double-click Level 2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2.rvt. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. Specify Girder for Usage. under Structural Plans. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. 3 In the Type Selector. Click Grid. click Modify. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. click Beam. 8 On the Design Bar.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. 6 Select grid lines H and J. click Training Files. click Finish. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Under Constraints. enter -0' 7". Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3.Perspective. for z-Direction Offset Value. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 20 Click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 19 In the Select Levels dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.9 On grids H and J. select Other. Click OK. click Modify. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 Select a column center. and draw a girder from column to column. expand 3D Views. Specify Girder for Usage. NOTE In the following image. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. for z-Direction Justification. framing the bays with girders. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. select Level 3 and Level 4. 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. click Beam. and click Select All Instances. and double-click East Section .

22 Click File menu ➤ Close. For Justification. click Training Files. For Spacing.rvt. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. enter 6' 0". Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. 7 Click OK. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Beam Type. Under Pattern. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. click Beam System. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. you add beam systems to Level 2. click Structural Beam System Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. double-click Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As. select Center. click Sketch. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. The next exercise uses a new training file.NOTE If necessary.

10 On the Design Bar. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the next step you edit the beam direction.8 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3. click Pick Supports. click Beam Direction.

Adding Beam Systems | 175 . the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Under Pattern. For Number of Lines. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 15 On the Design Bar. specify 2. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 14 When specifying the beam direction. click Finish Sketch.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. For Beam Type. select the girder between J2 and J3.

click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Pattern. click Beam System. 22 Click to place the beam system. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . Click OK. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. under Structural Plans. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Beam Type. specify 3. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. For Number of Lines. double-click Level 2. 19 On the Options Bar.

24 Click to place the beam system. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above.

To save changes. and click Select All Instances. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click East Sections . Notice the copied beam systems. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 31 Click OK. select Level 3 and Level 4. 32 In the Project Browser.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.Perspective. under 3D Views. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. Adding Beam Systems | 179 .

7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. click Finish Sketch. and then sketch along the girders. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. you add a composite deck to Level 2. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. click Lines. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Slab. double-click Level 2. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. Under Constraints. click Training Files. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. click Floor Properties.

under 3D Views.Perspective. 13 On the Design Bar.Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 In the dialog. double-click East Section . and click OK. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Modify. 14 In the Project Browser. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Level 3 and Level 4. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and when it highlights. 4 In the Project Browser. you add vertical bracing to a bay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. Adding Bracing In this exercise. 6 In the Type Selector. under Structural Plans. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Bracing on page 182. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Elevation 1-a. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Brace. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. double-click Level 2. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. click File menu ➤ Save As.To save changes. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8.

NOTE If necessary.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). Adding Bracing | 183 . and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4. 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace.

Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Perspective. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls. under 3D Views. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. click Training Files. under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.10 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. The next exercise uses a new training file. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4.rvt. Adding Shear Walls on page 184. double-click East Section .

tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. 6 Sketch 4 walls. Adding Shear Walls | 185 . click Structural Wall. TIP After sketching the walls. specify Ground Level.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Exterior .10" Concrete. 4 In the Type Selector. For Depth.

click . click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. 2 On the View toolbar. you add isolated foundations to column locations. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. under Constraints. double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 4 On the Options Bar. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file. 9 On the Options Bar. To save changes.rvt. TIP During selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. click . Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 8 Select all 4 walls. click Training Files.

the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. 6 On the Options Bar. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". double-click Ground Level. Under Analytical Model. Under Analytical Model. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 .5 In the Filter dialog. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. In your training file. NOTE In the following image. under Structural Plans. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Select Structural Columns. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. By default. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. click Modify. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 10 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Project Browser. Click OK. the footing is placed at Ground Level. 12 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. . 11 In the drawing area. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location.

double-click Level 2.Perspective. and concrete wall framing. click Training Files. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. double-click East Section .rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Structural Plans. Specify Girder for Usage. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. Click Grid. click File menu ➤ Save As. under 3D Views. In the exercises that follow. bracing. foundation. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. Completing the Structural Model on page 188.13 In the Project Browser. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. To save changes. openings. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. adding horizontal framing. you complete the structural model. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems.

5 Draw a pick box around all the grids.NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. Add beam chains to the following locations. 6 On the Options Bar. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. 7 On the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. click Finish. click Modify. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. click model. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . . complete the framing of this bay. ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E.

■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. ■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.

14 On the Options Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. for z-Direction Offset Value.Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. enter 3. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. select the top girder. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . and click Select All Instances. 13 Right-click. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. click Beam System. Click OK. click of the model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. for z-Direction Justification. enter -0' 7". Under Pattern. 20 Click to place the beam system. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. For Number of Lines. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Other. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click ■ ■ ■ . Under Constraints. Click OK. .

22 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Using the sketch tool. 24 On the Options Bar. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Finish Sketch. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Number of Lines. trace the outline of the bay. click Sketch. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. click Beam System. enter 3. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Under Pattern. Click OK. enter -0' 7" for Elevation.

27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. ignore it. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 .

you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. double-click Level 2. click model. under Structural Plans. beam systems have been added to all bays. 2 On the View toolbar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. click Training Files.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . . In addition. In this new training file. Lastly. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194.

for z-Direction Offset Value. select Other. 4 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. for z-Direction Justification. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . Click OK. click Beam. enter -0' 7". 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. Under Constraints.

Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. To save changes. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. click Beam. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. The next exercise uses a new training file. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. 10 In the Type Selector. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40.8 Using the same method. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196.

straight. the following new levels were added: 5. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. picked. under Structural Plans. Roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. 5 On the Design Bar. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. Garage Level-1. double-click Level 2. click Floor Properties. Click OK. In addition. 7. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. you can use a combination of lines including. 6. When sketching this deck. enter -0' 2".■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. For Height Offset from Level. and arced.rvt. In this training file. click Lines. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . sketched. click Training Files. click Slab. 3 On the Design Bar. and Foundation.

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . or close the exercise file without saving changes. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). click .TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. select Chain on the Options Bar. 7 Click Finish Sketch. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file. 8 On the View toolbar. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

59 On the Design Bar. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. click Modify. 60 Enter ZF. 62 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click (Join Geometry). Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. click . and on the Design Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . 65 Select the tapered roof. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click File menu ➤ Save As. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. click . and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. click Training Files. double-click 3D . you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. The next exercise uses a new training file. under 3D Views.Atrium. using the slab shape edit tools. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Level 5.66 In the Project Browser.

Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . The edge of the curved slab highlights.3 Select the atrium curved slab. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc. 4 On the Options Bar. click (Draw Split Lines). click (Modify Sub-Elements). and is available for modification. Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar.

9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. click (Add New Points). Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar. 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab.

11 On the Design Bar. Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that the shape edit points display. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . click . 14 Select the split lines. click Modify.Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. and press DELETE. 12 Select the curved slab.

under 3D Views. View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof. click . 17 On the View toolbar. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click 3D . Notice that the edges of the curved slab display.Atrium. and enter -0’ 6”. The general shape of the curved slab displays.Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension.

Atrium. click . 19 On the View toolbar.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. click section view. under Sections (Building Sections). click OK. under Structural Plans. . click Conform to Curve. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . 21 Select the slab. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Slab Shape Edit. under 3D Views. Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. click Project to side. double-click Level 5. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. double-click Section 3. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Curved Edge Condition.

click 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Click the center drainage point. enter SX (Snap to Point). . 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click . 29 Click the center drainage point. enter SX. and select the right endpoint of the curved slab. and select the left endpoint of the curved slab.27 On the Options Bar.

34 Select the atrium curved slab. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". double-click Level 5. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . click .31 On the Design Bar. double-click 3D . 32 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. under 3D Views. click Modify.Atrium. Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Options Bar.

Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. click section view. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Sections (Building Sections). To save changes. double-click 3D . double-click Section 3. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file.rvt. . 40 Proceed to the next exercise. 38 On the View toolbar. Adding Miter Joins on page 224.View. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 2 Select the slab. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.3 On the View Control Bar. You can now use the Beam Join Editor. 4 On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. The slab is now hidden. click . click (Edit Beam Joins). Adding Miter Joins | 225 .

7 Click the arrow control on the first beam. 226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.

The miter join is complete. The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View). Adding Miter Joins | 227 . 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join.

Notice the miter lock remains locked. select Detail Level: Fine. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. select Detail Level: Coarse. 12 On the View Control Bar.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. Adding Curved Beams on page 229. double-click Level 4. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . click . 13 On the Design Bar. you add a curved beam to the atrium. 2 On the View toolbar.Notice the miter lock remains locked. click File menu ➤ Save As. under Structural Plans.rvt. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes.

select Chain. and click . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Beam.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22.

8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid. Adding Curved Beams | 231 .

9 Press ESC twice. 10 Using the same method. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select the remaining curved beams. 12 While pressing CTRL. click .The beam is placed. 13 On the Options Bar. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams.

19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. and on the View Control Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. For Beam Type. Scroll down to Analytical Model. Click OK. and for Vertical Projection. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 22 Select the bottom beam. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam.Atrium. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. enter 6' 0". 20 On the Options Bar. select 3D. Click OK. Adding Curved Beams | 233 .14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. under Structural Plans. for Layout Rule. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. Under Pattern. click Beam System. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. For Maximum Spacing. For Elevation. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. double-click Level 4. enter 0' 0". enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. select Top. select Maximum Spacing. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 16 Select the floor. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. select Top of Beam. double-click 3D .

234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium. 23 Using the same method.The beam system is placed.

Adding Curved Beams | 235 . Select Use hard-points. under Structural Plans. and on the View Control Bar.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. 28 Select the floor. For Maximum discretized offset. 27 In the Project Browser. NOTE When hard-points are enabled. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select Approximate Curve. click . and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. .Atrium. Click OK. 25 Select the beam. enter 0' 4". double-click 3D . and on the Options Bar. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model.

click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. To save changes. you then copy the opening to each level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Ground Level. or close the exercise file without saving changes.rvt. click Training Files.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding an Opening on page 236. 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding an Opening In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the stairway. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. click . 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Door.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. Adding an Opening | 237 . 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 Select the door opening.

14 On the View toolbar. select 3D View. select Level 2. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 While pressing SHIFT. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 11 Click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. .. click stairway. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Level 7. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. 9 In the Select Levels dialog. under 3D Views.

click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. click . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 . 2 On the View toolbar. The next exercise uses a new training file. and double-click 3D View. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. expand 3D Views. you import the revised beam back into the project. You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. click Training Files.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. Finally.

5 Using the sketch tools. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. 6 On the Design Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Component. 8 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 9 Using the sketch tool. 10 On the Design Bar. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. click Finish Sketch.

Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. enter 0' 2". you load the new family into the project. and double-click 3D View. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. 15 Continue with the next exercise. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. To save changes. Click OK.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. Finally. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . click ■ ■ . The next exercise uses a new training file. for d. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand 3D Views. 12 On the Options Bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . select both stiffener plates. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files.

and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. The beam is displayed in a new window. 9 In the Work Plane dialog. click . under Specify a New Work Plane. click located to the left of Offset. 5 In the Revit dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 8 On the Family Design Bar. and click (Circle). and double-click Front. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. 13 Press ESC. click Edit Family. and draw a circle approximately as shown. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. 7 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Family Design Bar. click Name.3 Select the beam. click Modify. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed.

18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. 24 On the Design Bar. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. 17 On the Options Bar. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. click (Align). regardless of the length. and the select the centerline of the circle. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Press ESC. . click The centerline of the circle is now visible. 25 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . and on the Options Bar.15 Select the circle. 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and select the centerline of the circle. click . click (Align).

select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow.rfa. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder.26 Select the circle on the beam. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. 27 On the View Control toolbar. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

click Load into Projects. 33 Enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. 34 On the View toolbar.rvt located in the Imperial project file. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . click . Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector.rfa. 38 Click in the drawing area. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. 36 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. The project file reopens. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40.

In addition. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. In this new training file. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add structural walls. click Training Files. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. 40 Continue with the next exercise. To save changes. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As.The modified beams with openings display.

enter -0' 6". click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. select Basic Wall: Foundation . For Base Constraint. select Foundation. for Location Line. 3 In the Type Selector. under Structural Plans.Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ground Level. click Structural Wall. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . 4 On the Options Bar. . The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Wall Centerline. 6 On the Options Bar.12" Concrete. For Top Offset.

13 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. On portions of the south wall. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. click . under 3D Views. and select Chain. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments.A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. double-click 3D View. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . and select the foundation wall chain. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. double-click Ground Level. select Foundation for Depth.To save changes. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Modify. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Structural Column. such as the atrium. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. In addition. 4 In the Options Bar. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. under 3D Views. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click 3D View. 9 On the View Control Bar. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. press TAB. 7 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click Hide Element. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise.

10 On the View Control Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. click Training Files.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. sloped slabs. click Floor Properties. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter 0. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. and concrete beam framing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Pick Walls. click Slab. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. For Height Offset From Level. under Structural Plans.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. double-click Ground Level. Click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. The next exercise uses a new training file. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. select 6" Concrete. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. The foundation wall is displayed.

click Yes. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 .6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. under 3D Views. 7 Click Finish Sketch. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. click Delete Type. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible. double-click 3D View. If necessary. 8 In the Project Browser.

It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. under Structural Plans. 16 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. It will display as selected in the drawing area. 14 Select all grid lines. click Grid. click Finish. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. expand the warning and select the framing element. and another between G4 and G5. double-click Ground Level. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. click Beam. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. select the line. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3.

25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 29 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Filter dialog. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. click . 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Garage Level -1. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. click Modify. double-click 3D View. and click OK. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . 22 On the Options Bar.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. 27 In the Project Browser. Other) and Floors. select Structural Framing (Girder. NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. click Check None. under 3D Views. Joist. and then click OK.

38 Right-click the slope arrow. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. For Height Offset at Head. enter 0' 6". 31 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. double-click Garage Level -1. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 34 On the Design Bar.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. 42 On the View Control Bar. enter 0. select Garage Level-1. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South Elevation. 36 On the Design Bar. For Level at Head. under Structural Plans. click the Model Graphics Style control. 40 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Lines. click Slope Arrow. and click Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. click the Model Graphics Style control. and select Element Properties. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Height Offset at Tail. click Slab. 41 In the Project Browser.

click Beam System. For Value. click Set Work Plane. 48 In the Work Plane dialog. select Ground Level. select Structural Beam System Properties. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . 45 On the View toolbar. . under 3D Views. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. under Specify a new Work Plane. Under Pattern. 50 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. and zoom in on the ramp. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. 47 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Number of Lines. select Pick a plane.Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. enter 5. Click OK. 53 On the View toolbar. click 54 On the Design Bar. double-click 3D View. 52 In the Project Browser. under Structural Views. click . and click OK. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value.

click Finish Sketch. click . double-click 3D View. 57 In the Project Browser. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. there are no drawing tools to select. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 58 On the View toolbar. 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. and zoom in on the ramp. under 3D Views. 62 Sketch the opening. click . Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar.56 On the Design Bar. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. corner to corner. When you are adding a wall opening.

Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. The next exercise uses a new training file. 64 Select the garage opening. In this case. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. click Modify.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. and continue with the next step. click Unjoin Elements. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . 63 On the Design Bar. In addition. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model.

and click to select the foundation wall chain. clear Structural Framing. click Edit/New. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. click Modify. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Foundation. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls. enter 1' 6". for Toe length. For Heel length. Under Dimensions. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". enter 1' 6". 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. click Foundation ➤ Wall.rvt. A continuous foundation is added. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. 13 In the Type Selector. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. For Foundation Thickness. and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 2 Enter ZF. enter 1' 6". Click OK twice.

18 Proceed to the next tutorial. In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Precast Concrete on page 261. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . double-click 3D View. You can save the open file if you wish. under 3D Views. 16 In the Project Browser.

260 .

you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise.rvt. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. double-click Roof. click Training Files. click Beam System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure. under Structural Plans. In the first lesson.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 261 .

For Beam Type. 6 Click to place the beam system. For Clear Spacing. select Center.3 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . double-click 3D. 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". under 3D Views. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. For Justification. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. 262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . do the following: For Layout Rule. under Pattern. select Clear Spacing. The beam system is displayed. enter 0' 1". Click OK.

Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 . Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise.rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. .8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263. i_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt. 1 On the View Toolbar. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. click shown.

7 Proceed to the next exercise. click . under Sections (Building Section). 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the spacing between each precast beam. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the beam system. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. enter 0' 5". The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. under Construction. and click OK. i_RST_Precast-in progress. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Section 1. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. double-click Roof. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. for Start and End Extension. under Structural Plans.3 Right-click the selected beam.

Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise.4 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Section). Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. for Clear Spacing. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. You then import the revised beam back into the project. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. click . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. and click OK. under Construction. enter 0' 0".

and double-click Left. 2 On the Options Bar. i_RST_Precast-in progress.rvt. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 4 In the Family Project Browser.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 3 In the Revit dialog. click Edit Family. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown. The beam is displayed in a new window. 5 Select the beam.

and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. Click Apply. 8 In the Revit dialog. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . click . and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. ■ ■ Under Visibility.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. and click Edit. click the Annotations Categories tab. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. and then click OK. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile.

15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". for Is Reference. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. click Ref Plane. under Options. and click Modify. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 16 Press ESC. Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown. select Not a Reference.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. click .

and click OK. click . select both vertical reference planes.22 Press ESC. under Options. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 Press ESC. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. for Is Reference. select Not a Reference. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . click Dimension. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 26 While pressing CTRL.

270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam. 34 Press ESC. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. 32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. click .31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam.

39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. select the vertical reference plane as shown. 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 38 For the align-to point. 41 Press ESC.

45 On the Design bar. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. 47 Press ESC. click Lines. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .44 Press DELETE. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam.

50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam.Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 51 On the View Toolbar. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 . click .

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. Align the bottom horizontal surface. enter 10' 0". click Family Types. If it does not. Creating Drawings on page 275. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. Sketch the new profile. The beam should adapt to all changes. and click Yes. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. click Load into Projects. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. For Width. select Override parameter values of existing types. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. enter 6' 0". Add dimensions to each reference plane. Click Apply. 54 In the Family Types dialog.

and three-dimensional (3D) views. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. begin by first creating sheets. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. which are a type of view in a project. elevation.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. usually contain a title block. and how to create new views from a model. 3D view. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. and section views. section. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 275 . how to add views to the sheets. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. Sheets are defined by borders. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. and are accessible from the Project Browser. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project.

TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. For Project Status. click Edit for Project Address. Anytown. enter 31 March 2006. enter Office Structure. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 6 Click OK. For Project Number. Smith. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information.rvt. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. 4 Click OK. enter J. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. For Client Name. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. and click OK. enter Initial Draft. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. MA 12345. enter 2006-01. right-click. For Project Name. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and click View. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Sheet. click Training Files.

11 When the title block highlights. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. enter Plans and Elevations. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number.Unnamed. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click Add View. and click to place the view. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 13 Click OK. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . 9 In the Project Browser. select Structural Plan: Level 2. and select the title block. 15 In the Views dialog box. enter S-1. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 .NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. on the Options Bar. expand Sheets (all). do the following: ■ ■ .

Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar.17 With the view selected. specify 1/16" = 1'. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. right-click. and click View Properties. Click OK. select Elevation: South Elevation. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 In the Views dialog box. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. Under Extents. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. and click Element Properties. NOTE If necessary. right-click. clear Crop View. specify 1/16" = 1'. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.0" for View Scale. under Graphics. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. right-click. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 24 With the view selected. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. and click OK.0" for View Scale. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. click Add View. and click Element Properties.

32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select 3D View: East Section . Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . 30 In the Views dialog box. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.Perspective. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. and click Add View to Sheet. and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. NOTE If necessary. click Add View. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view.NOTE If necessary.

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. is displayed in the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 Select the title block. add a section view. you add a new sheet to the project.rvt. The new sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. and on the Options Bar. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. click Sheet. and click OK. and adjust the scale of the view. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click . Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. and click OK. incrementally named S-2 Section Views. under Sheets (all). under Identity Data. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Create a section view of Level 2. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 .NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. click Section. 2 On the View Toolbar. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). select 1/16" = 1'. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0" for Scale. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. click .

select Section: Section 1. 10 With the view selected. right-click. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. double click Section 1.0" for View Scale. under Graphics. double-click S-2 Section Views. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). click Add View. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. under Sections (Building Sections). NOTE If necessary.■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. specify 3/16" = 1' . 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and click Add View to Sheet. and click OK. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Views dialog box. and click Properties. Create a callout view.

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . click Callout. and drag the view onto the sheet. as shown. under Sheets (all). 19 In the Project Browser. right-click. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar.15 On the View Toolbar. under Graphics. specify 3/4" = 1'. and click OK. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. click . 21 With the view selected. double-click S-2 Section Views. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and position it approximately as shown. under Sections (Building Sections). 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view.0" for View Scale. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. click Callout of section 1. and click Properties. 20 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon.

you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects.1 . you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.rvt.TYPICAL DETAILS. and double-click S. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Creating a Detail Library on page 284. expand Sheets (all). Instead of having to draw these details for every project. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise.NOTE If necessary. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 .TYPICAL DETAILS. 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views.Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. Open the new folder. select Drawing Sheet: S. and click OK. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. 3 In the Save Views dialog. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder.1 . Enter Detail Library for the folder name.

when you insert these views into a new project. 6 In the Save Views dialog. Click OK. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. enter Footing Section. Click Save. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. however. clear Drawing Sheet: S.■ ■ Under File name. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. only the 2D elements will be inserted. Under Views. select Show drafting views only. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details. Select both Footing Section views. 9 Proceed to the next exercise.TYPICAL DETAILS. NOTE When you save your file. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. For File name.1 . Only the drafting views will be displayed.

rvt. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. Click Open. Importing Details from the Library | 287 .TYPICAL DETAILS.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. you learn how import details from the newly created library. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens. close the warning dialog that appears. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.1 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. a duplicate types dialog displays. click Training Files. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise.rvt. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S.

select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION. 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. and double-click S.TYPICAL DETAILS. expand Sheets (all).1 . Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. Select the file FOOTING SECTION. Click Open.rvt.5 In the Project Browser. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. 7 In the Open dialog. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .

Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Importing Details from the Library | 289 .■ Click OK. a duplicate types dialog appears.

Select the file Footing Sections. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.rvt.

■ Click Open. Click OK. Click OK. Importing Details from the Library | 291 . select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. 11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views. a duplicate types dialog appears.

Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. and so on). 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . On construction documents. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. On construction documents. Finally. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. concrete schedule. Using Legends on page 292.

and click Rename. enter Symbol Legend for Name. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head .Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . i_RST_Drawings-in progress.rvt. expand Legends. and click OK. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown.Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 . 4 In the Rename View dialog box. click Symbol. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

9 On the Options bar. click Duplicate. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. 12 Under Text. click Text. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. On the Design Bar. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK twice. enter 1/8" for Text Size. and click OK. click . Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. 8 In the Type Selector. enter 1/8" text for Name. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Edit/New.

enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Symbol Legend. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 . and click to place it.Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar.15 Working from the top down. expand Sheets (all).Spacer Weld Symbol .Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click S-1 .

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Heading. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit for Value. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Bottom Bars. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 30 Under Scheduled fields. The new rebar field is added. enter Top Bars for Name. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Fields. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The Rebar field is renamed. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. click OK. select REBAR. Click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. click OK. click Add Parameter. select Text. click OK. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Type of Parameter.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The schedule is updated with the joist information. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. and under Top Bars. under Schedules/Quantities. under Bottom Bars. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. To save changes. and enter REBAR. click Edit for Value. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. select2-#5C. enter 2-#5 C. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. and under Top Bars. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. The next exercise uses a new training file. For Joists B3. click Group. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. 35 Click the new heading. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. under the Fields parameter. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Options bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. under Bottom Bars. or close the exercise file without saving changes.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. and click View Properties. For Joists B2. under Bottom Bars. and under Top Bars. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A new blank cell is created above the columns. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. select 2-#5C. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. and click Add. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. click OK. select Cost. 8 Under Joist B1. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click OK. ■ Click OK.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter 3 for Cost. Click Calculated Value. and click Add. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Number for Type. select Volume. Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. Because cost is a type parameter. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. and press ENTER. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. Under Available Fields. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. clear Use default settings. click OK. select Total Cost.5 for Cost. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. enter 1. and press ENTER. select 2 Decimal Places. select Total Cost. Under Rounding. In the Format dialog. click Edit for Value. Click OK. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. Under Units. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . Under Fields. Under Fields. and click View Properties. 9 Under Joist B2. click Edit for Value. Under Unit Symbol. under Formatting. under Formatting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. select $. select Currency. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. Under Field Formatting. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. click Field Format. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next lesson uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. To save changes. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. click File menu ➤ Save As. click OK. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project.■ Click OK. click OK. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS.

Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. click Edit for Hidden Levels. Garage Level . 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Foundation.1. 6 On the Toolbar. click Graphical Column Schedule. and zoom in on the schedule. and click OK. The schedule is created automatically. click OK. and select View Properties. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 . 2 Right-click the column schedule. and Ground Level. under Other. click .

Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below. The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column.

For Column Locations.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. and for Grid Appearance. under Vertical Heights. click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Edit. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. select Group Similar Locations. and select View Properties. enter 3". Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . and click OK. for Below Bottom Level. enter 3". In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. under Horizontal Widths.

you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. and then select Bold. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. The next exercise uses a new training file. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. and then select Bold and Italic. select Courier New from the drop-down list. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. and select View Properties. and click OK. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Edit for Value. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . under Graphical Column Schedules. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. and select View Properties. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. 9 Right-click the schedule. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. under Graphics. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. under Text Appearance. 2 Right-click the schedule. For Level text.

6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. 7 Click OK. Enter 2" for Level Names. under Identity Data. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.5 Click the Grid Appearance tab.

Click OK. 11 On the Options bar. clear Structural Columns. select Vertical. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Under Orientation. and clear Leader. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. click Tag ➤ By Category. select Structural Column Tags. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. 18 In the Filter dialog. 17 On the Options bar. and click OK. click Vertical.

click 20 On the Toolbar. click . and select View Properties. Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . and zoom in on one of the column tags.19 On the Toolbar. and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. .

select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. enter S-3. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. enter Steel Column Schedule. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click ■ ■ ■ .0". click Sheet. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. ■ ■ Under View Scale. and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Sheets (all). enter 1/4" = 1' . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK.22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 10. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. do the following. click File menu ➤ Save As. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. Under Sheet Number. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. 23 Click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and select the titleblock. Under Column Locations per Segment. To save changes. click Modify.

select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. click Sheet. Click OK. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . 16 In the Element Properties dialog.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. 10 Select the schedule. Under Sheet Number. click Modify. 14 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). 8 In the Views dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 15 On the Options bar. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. enter S-4. click Add View. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. and click to place the view. click . 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. click ■ ■ ■ . 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. and double-click Sheet S-4. and select the titleblock. and click OK. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. select Graphical Column Schedule. select Steel Column Schedule. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Extents.

and click Next. and click to place the view. 25 On the Project Browser.19 On the Project Browser.rvt. click the File Data Source tab. click OK. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. and drag it onto the sheet. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. under Graphical Column Schedule. expand Sheets (all). 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click New. under Database. select a location for the database file. and drag it onto the sheet. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. expand Sheets (all). Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 On the Project Browser. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. click Training Files. 6 Click Finish. 8 In the New Database dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click to place the view. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . under Graphical Column Schedule. under Database Name. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. 9 Under Directories. 26 On the Project Browser. and double-click Sheet S-6. 10 When the confirmation message displays. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click Next. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and click to place the view. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. To save changes. under Graphical Column Schedule. enter Revit_Project.mdb. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click Create. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click OK to create the database. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

For example. Steel Details on page 329. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The next tutorial uses a new training file. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . so that each table of elements includes an ID column. 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.

328 .

you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details.Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). expand Views (all). Structural Plans. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. 2 Select . 329 . Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). revise a callout view. and add these views to a sheet. click Training Files.rvt. You cut a section in plan. and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. and double-click Level 4. revise an existing elevation view.

double-click Level 4.3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 7 Select . 4 In the elevation view. under Structural Plans.0". Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. click Section. and select 3/4" =1' . and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. select the elevation crop view. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

10 On the Design Bar. and select 1/2" =1' . 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view.0". 12 Select the section crop view. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).9 Draw a section as shown. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Modify. 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 15 Select . A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. double-click West Elevation.

and select 3/4" =1' . select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. and click Add View to Sheet. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. and click OK.0". 27 In the Views dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. and click Add View. Create a sheet and place the section. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click Add View to Sheet. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Rename. and click OK. elevation. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click S-6 . enter Steel Details for Name. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 20 In the Project Browser. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. right-click S-6 . and click to place the view. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .Steel Details. and click to place the view. right-click S-6 . 22 In the Sheet Title dialog.Steel Details.17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. select Section: Section 1. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Views dialog. expand Sheets (all). and click Add View. and click Add View. 30 In the Views dialog. 29 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place the view. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet.Steel Details. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

under Elevations (Interior Elevation). Detailing Steel In this lesson. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. click braces meet at Level 4.rvt. and a facade support detail to the model. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . You will sketch the lines in a model view. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. double click Elevation 1-a. i_RST_DET-in progress. you add a welded bracing detail. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. a bolted angle detail. Detailing Steel on page 333. .rvt. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. 2 On the Toolbar.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.3 Select the left brace. enter the value. 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown. TIP After establishing the line direction. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. click Detail Lines.

13 On the Options Bar. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. and click to place the detail line. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. click Offset. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to place this line. enter 2' 6" for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. select Numerical. click Detail Lines. click . and select Copy.Next. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

15 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. and select the horizontal detail line. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. click Modify. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. 336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

click the left top weld annotation. 21 Select the weld symbol. and enter 3/8. click Modify. and click to place it. and select the weld symbol. 24 On the Options Bar. and enter a period.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. 20 Click Modify. Repeat for the right bottom value. Repeat for the left bottom value. click Add a Leader. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. drag it into the view as shown. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. and press DELETE to delete this element. 23 On the Design Bar. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown.

27 Right-click the new weld symbol. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural.26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. select Weld All Around. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. Click OK. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Graphics. and click Properties.

and enter 3/8" PL for text. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. TYPICAL for text as shown. click . i_RST_DET-in progress. double-click Section 1.rvt. 30 On the Options Bar. click Text. under Sections. 1 In the Project Browser.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. In the first part of the exercise. 33 On the Options Bar. Then you add some annotations. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. click . 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project.

3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.2 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. click Detail Lines. click Text. select L4x4x5/16. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 .8 Enter the text notes as shown. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. . i_RST_DET-in progress. double-click West Elevation. 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Level 4 at Grid 4.

move it to the position shown. 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and click to place it. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Edit toolbar. click .3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. select C5x6. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall.7. and select the left side of the column as shown. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section.

10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown. select the back of the channel as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 .9 Next.

14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. A325 BOLT. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close.7. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. 18 Proceed to the next lesson.11 In the Project Browser. You can save the open file if you wish. under Sheets. 16 In the Project Browser. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next lesson. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. click Text. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . select the bolt. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. a new training file is supplied.

enter Typical Detail . Under Scale. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. select K-Series Bar Joist . 9 In the Type Selector. Click OK.Deck Span Transition. click Training Files. 2 In the New Drafting dialog. select Detail Component. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. click Modify. and double-click Typical Detail . Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Deck Span Transition. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. expand Drafting Views. select 1 1/2" = 1' .Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.0". click Drafting View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 On the Design bar. 3 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 . 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector.Side: 14K3.rvt. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown.Section: W18x35. select Detail Component. 11 On the Design bar.

select Detail Component.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . select Repeating Detail. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck.5 WR 22. select Detail Component. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck. 19 In the Type Selector. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select AISC Tube Shapes . click Modify. 23 In the Type Selector. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. 13 In the Type Selector. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.125. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. 14 Click the end of the joist. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. click Modify. 21 On the Design bar. 17 On the Design bar.

Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Click OK. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. click Modify. and select Symbol Right. clear Symbol Left. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. 29 On the Design bar. select Detail Component. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Field Weld. 31 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click to place it. drag it into the view as shown.25 On the Design bar. 27 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the weld symbol. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. Under Other.

36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. click Add a Leader. and select the weld symbol. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Text. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. 38 On the Options Bar. click . 40 On the Design bar. 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Text. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar.

43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 44 Proceed to the next tutorial. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . and navigate to a folder location of your choice. Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351.

350 .

351 .Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson. you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure.

NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 2 On the Toolbar. click . under Detail Views (Detail). and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area. positioned to the right of the drawing area. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .rvt. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. double-click Beam Detail.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. select Rebar Bar: #4.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. 6 Hover over the section view. scroll down the list of available shapes. For training purposes. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 . and select Rebar Shape: S3. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library.

8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. click Modify. and select Rebar Shape: T9. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Spacing. and select Rebar Shape: 01. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. and select Rebar Shape: 01. enter 0’ 6”. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. approximately as shown. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. scroll down the list of available shapes. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. scroll down the list of available shapes. and on the Options Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. select Maximum Spacing.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. enter 4. select Fixed Number. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. For Quantity. click Modify. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. approximately as shown. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . For Layout. 21 On the Design Bar.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. select Rebar Bar: #6.

and click OK. 30 On the Toolbar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click . select both View unobscured and View as solid. under 3D Views. select Detail Level: Fine. under Graphics. 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. click . click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for View Visibility States. 28 On the View Control Bar.23 On the Options Bar. for 3D View. 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. double-click 3D.

Notice that the rebar sets are visible. Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. click 32 Select the rebar as shown. . and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 .

358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . To save changes. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file.33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required.

click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. click . Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. double-click Column Detail. under Detail Views (Detail). Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf.Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise.rvt. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 . This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. positioned to the right of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Toolbar. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. click Training Files. you model reinforcement in a concrete column.

6 Hover over the section view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. scroll down the list of available shapes. For training purposes. For Layout. select Maximum Spacing. enter 0’ 3”. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. select Rebar Bar: #4. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. select Rebar Bar: #4. click Modify. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 8 On the Design Bar. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. and select Rebar Shape: T1. and on the Options Bar.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. For Spacing.

Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.10 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Edit toolbar. enter 3. click (Copy). do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. as shown. select Fixed Number. scroll down the list of available shapes. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. For Quantity. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. click Modify. click Modify. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. and on the Options Bar. For Layout. and select Rebar Shape: 00. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . 15 On the Design Bar. select Rebar Bar: #8.

19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown. 362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 29 On the Toolbar. under Graphics. 27 On the View Control Bar. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . click Edit for View Visibility States. click . 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. for 3D View. click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog.22 On the Options Bar. View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. select Detail Level: Fine. click . and click OK. select both View unobscured and View as solid.

The next exercise uses a new training file. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .rvt. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select the crop view. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. click . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . under Structural Plans. 2 On the Toolbar. double-click Garage Level-1.0" for Scale. 7 In the section view.Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 6 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. select 3/4" = 1' . click Section.

double-click 3D. under 3D Views. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 9 In the Project Browser.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall.

11 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 . 12 On the Design Bar.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below.

The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. click Major Direction Edge. 13 On the Design Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). To change the major direction. on the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. under Sections (Building Sections). adjacent to the major bars. double-click Section 3.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown.

Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement.The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 .

17 In the Element Properties dialog. click . clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction. under Layers. 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement.

For Interior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. under Layers. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fixed Number. Click OK.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. under Construction. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. enter 30. and click OK. enter 30. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. for Value. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines.

and click OK. click Modify. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. change all Bar Types to #4. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Zoom to Fit. 20 On the Design Bar. 28 Using the drag control. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Layers. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . .

The next exercise uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Garage Level-1. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . 2 On the Toolbar. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . under Structural Plans. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.

0". For Model Graphics Style. select Fine. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. select the crop view. 7 In the section view. select Shading w/Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Detail Level. select 1/4" = 1' . 6 On the View Control Bar. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Section. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown.

11 Using the line tool. draw an area reinforcement box as shown.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. click . double-click Garage Level -1. under Structural Plans. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . to enter sketch mode. 9 Select the concrete slab as shown.

click Finish Sketch. under Sections (Building Sections).12 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 4. 376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 13 In the Project Browser.

19 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. under Layers. select Attached End. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. under Layers. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 22 On the Design Bar. click . Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. and click OK. clear Top Major Direction. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. 23 Select the rebar tag. 24 Using the drag control. change all Bar Types to #4.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed.

25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. 4 Select the slab opening. click Training Files. 2 On the Toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. double-click Level 3. The next exercise uses a new training file. You are now in sketch mode. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . or close the exercise file without saving changes. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Structural Plans.rvt. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement.5 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 . The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. click . 7 On the Design Bar.

for Primary Bar . select Fine. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Model Graphics Style. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 16 On the View Control Bar. select 1/4" = 1' . select the crop view.0". 17 In the section view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select Shading w/Edges. and click OK. click Create a section view . 14 On the Design Bar. select #4. For Detail Level. click Modify.10 On the Options Bar.Type. click Section. under Layers. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown.

select Free End. . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. 24 Select the rebar tag. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. 25 Using the drag control. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click 19 Select the rebar. 23 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . click Modify. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

2 On the Toolbar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Training Files. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. draw a pick box. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. . under Structural Plans. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. click structure.rvt. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. To save changes. and position the upper drag bar as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. double-click Ground Level.

and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown. Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 .4 Press ESC. click . The Section 1 view opens. 5 Double-click the section bubble.

select Boundary between faces. 8 On the Options Bar. 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Finish Sketch. and click (Line). click (Draw).NOTE For training purposes. 11 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Toolbar. 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch 3 lines as shown. click (Edit Cut Profile). select Chain. Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar).

The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . 19 On the Options Bar. 16 Press ESC. click Sketch. 17 On the Sketch tab. 13 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. click Sketch. click Finish Sketch. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. under Construction. 23 On the Sketch tab.90 deg. 22 Press ESC. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Finish Sketch. 26 Click OK. for Hook At Start. select Standard . and click Element Properties. Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.

click wall. and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. 30 In the Type Selector. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. 31 Select the end of the straight bar. select Rebar Bar: #8. Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . (Mirror).Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar.

37 Select the rebar set. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. click Modify. enter 4". 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. 36 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. 33 On the Design Bar. select Minimum Clear Spacing.Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. For Spacing. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

click Modify. 41 On the Options Bar. Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 .39 On the Design Bar. (Pick Elements). Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar. click 42 Select the footing. click (Edit Rebar Cover).

(Pick Faces). . 47 Select the face of the structural wall.43 On the Options Bar. enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. click 46 On the Options Bar. do the following: Click Add. Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. For Setting. 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Description. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). Click OK. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. enter 0' 2".

52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. Click OK. click ■ ■ . do the following: Under Description.48 On the Options Bar. select Exposed/Cast against Earth. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. click Dimension. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 .

Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. or close the exercise file without saving changes. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 53 Click to select this plane. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. and position the drag bar as shown. draw a pick box. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor down. click Training Files. double-click Garage Level .rvt.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click the section line. 2 On the Toolbar. click Modify.1. 5 On the Design Bar. click structure. click Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . under Structural Plans. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and select 3/4" = 1'.7 Press ESC. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .0". The Section 2 view opens. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. select the crop view. 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 8 Double-click the section bubble. 9 In the section view.

select Rebar Bar : #7. select Maximum Spacing. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. click Modify. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. do the following: ■ For Layout. 12 In the Type Selector. Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. as shown. 14 On the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement.NOTE For training purposes.

Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level . Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar. 22 On the Edit toolbar. click . click (Mirror). 19 Select the rebar set. The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. enter 1' 6". click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.1. 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. draw a zoom box.■ For Spacing.

Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. 28 On the Options Bar.24 Click to place the rebar. click Sketch. Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 26 On the Toolbar. and click Zoom to Fit.

click .1. 36 On the Edit toolbar. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point. Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. 34 On the Design Bar. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level . 32 Click to place the rebar. click Finish Sketch. 33 Press ESC. 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears.You are now in sketch mode.

Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 . Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.38 Click to place the rebar.

and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown. 400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .40 Press CTRL.

41 On the Options Bar. click Edit for View Visibility States. 45 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. click OK. select View unobscured and View as solid. and click OK. for 3D View. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . under Graphics. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. double-click 3D. click . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible.

enter 1' 6". For Spacing. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. Notice the rebar is visible. click File menu ➤ Save As. 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . To save changes. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. select Maximum Spacing. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. and on the Options Bar. click .47 On the Toolbar. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial.

In Revit Structure. click Training Files. 403 . radial. By default. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. Dimensioning In this lesson. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. baseline. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and ordinate. and double-click Floor. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. angular. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. The dimension types include aligned. select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. multi-segmented. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. linear.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. click Dimension. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.

toward the empty space outside the wall.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. 6 Move the cursor to the left. select it.

10 On the Toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. and press DELETE. 13 On the Options Bar. indicating that the dimension can be modified. and click to set the dimension location. 7 Click the lock. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. select Wall faces for Prefer. (Undo). 11 Select the dimension. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. The lock displays as locked. click Dimension. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 405 . A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. click the lock to unlock it. select Wall centerlines for Prefer.The dimension displays in the drawing. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building.

and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. and click to place the dimension. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. 19 On the Options Bar.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. In addition. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Dimension. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length.

24 On the Options Bar. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. click for Prefer. ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . click Dimension. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. and press DELETE. and select Wall faces for Prefer. Select the inside face of the wall. click Modify.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. the default dimension option. and place the dimension as shown. and click to place the dimension. click ■ ■ . as shown. 23 On the Design Bar.

. Click Apply. select Baseline. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. click Dimension. 34 On the Options Bar. and OK. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. click . click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 36 In the Type Properties dialog.Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. Move your cursor to the right. click Edit/New. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. for Dimension String Type. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. click Modify. click . Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar.

do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Click Apply. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. and OK. for Dimension String Type.39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. click Edit/New. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. select Ordinate. click . click OK. Creating Dimensions | 409 . Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). click Modify. 41 On the Design Bar. 43 On the Options Bar. . 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

50 In the Dimension Text dialog. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. and enter S. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. 51 On the Design Bar. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. Click Apply and OK. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step.D. do the following: ■ ■ For Below.A.6" Click Apply and OK. enter V. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text. (See Architectural Drawing). +/. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 48 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Text Fields.M. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411.I. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5).A.Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). click Modify.F. click Replace with Text.

4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. but do not select anything. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. a different wall selection choice highlights.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. and select the exterior face. for a multi-segmented dimension. Each time you press TAB. and select it. click Dimension. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. in some cases. When you place dimensions. delete. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. 11 Place the dimension as shown. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. and select the exterior face. select it. 6 Position the cursor over the wall.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. and press TAB repeatedly. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. However. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. including the wall centerline. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. you learn to add. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For example.

and control boxes display on each witness line. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. The dimension highlights. click Modify.Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar.

14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. 17 Right-click the control box. The witness line is deleted. The witness line moves to interior wall face. 15 Click the control box again. but do not select it. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . The witness line moves to the wall centerline. and click Delete Witness Line.

click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. click Modify. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. 20 To end the editing command. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 2 On the Options Bar. and click Edit Witness Lines. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. a context menu with different options is displayed. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The full dimension string is displayed. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building.rvt. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. If you right-click the control box.

you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. click Training Files. a lock symbol immediately displays. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. click Modify. if 2 or more walls are colinear. then Up for Read Convention. The dimension updates as shown. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 6 On the Design Bar. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. a new training file is provided. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. Under Text. 5 Click OK twice. not the direction it is read. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. As you create components. For example. when sketching walls. You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort.4 In the Type Properties dialog. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. select Right.

while the second component moves to complete the alignment. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. 6 Select the short wall to the left. indicating that the Align command is active. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. click (Align). When you align 2 components. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The symbol changes to a closed lock. select Multiple Alignment. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. 3 Click the lock. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

11 On the Toolbar. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. click (Undo) once to undo the move. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . 9 On the Design Bar. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). 12 Click the right wall. and drag it downward.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. click Modify. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. Do not lock this segment of the alignment.

clear Multiple Alignment. 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar.Move the walls to verify the alignment. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. click (Align). 14 On the Options Bar. 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

20 Click the lock to unlock it. click . 22 Align the remaining windows.The 2 windows align. click Modify. A lock is displayed. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. and align the windows. indicating the constraint. on the Design Bar. as shown. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . 21 On the Toolbar. 19 To view the constraint. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise.rvt. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. i_RST_Alignment-in progress. 1 View the south wall. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt. and notice that it includes 5 openings. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

3 On the Options Bar. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 5 Click OK. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. Click Options. the windows). 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. and click to add the dimension. The 2 vertical walls highlight. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. click (Create Aligned Dimensions). For Prefer. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. select Entire Walls. 6 Select the south wall. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Modify. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. For Pick. select Openings and Widths. a new training file is provided. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog.2 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure.

6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. click Training Files.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. Click to place the spot dimension. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. expand Structural Plans. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Click to create the second leader point.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. click . select Current Level. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. select Leader. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. and for Relative Base. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left. and double-click New Roof. 4 In the Type Selector. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown.

select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). . click Modify. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. select Leader. and for Relative Base. 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. Click to place the spot dimension. Click to create the second leader point.■ On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. 9 In the Type Selector. select Current Level. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right.

click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. and double-click Foundation. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. click Modify. and Current Level for Relative Base. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 15 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor up and to the right. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. expand Structural Plans.■ On the Design Bar. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click to create the second leader point. select Leader. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). 16 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ Click OK. ■ On the Design Bar. Click to create the third leader point.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. click Modify. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . enter TOF=. click ■ . 19 On the Options Bar. Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. for Single/Upper Value Prefix. do the following: Under Text. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

and then OK. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. select Medium. click OK.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. click Edit/New. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. 29 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. Click Apply. and double-click South Elevation. under Text. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . For Text Location. 27 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. for Detail Level. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select In-line with Leader. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog.

For Elevation Indicator.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Apply. Click to create the second leader point. click Modify. select In-line with Leader. click OK. click Modify. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. 33 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. click Edit/New. Move the cursor to the right. On the Design Bar. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Click to place the spot coordinate. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and then OK. For Text Location. enter EL. under Text.

expand Structural Plans.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. Annotating In this lesson. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Beam Annotations. In the next lesson. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . a new training file is provided. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Annotating on page 428. You can save the open file if you wish. and double-click Level 2. Tagging Beams In this exercise. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

for Horizontal End Offset. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. NOTE For training purposes. In the Placement Settings dialog. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . Click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. select All selected beams in current plan view. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. select All beams in current plan view. and click OK. enter 1". do the following: ■ Under Placement. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. Click Settings. click Beam Annotations.

Under Structural Framing Tag. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . under Select Element to Place. click OK. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar. under Analysis Results.0 kip for End Reaction . The end reaction value is added to the selected beams. select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. enter 10. and click OK. click . Click .Live. ■ Under Annotation location and type. click the Level beams in plan tab. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Structural Framing Tag.

19 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. and on the Options Bar. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. Tagging Beams | 431 . . click Modify. and then OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. under Type Mark.9 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. click Apply. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). enter W18. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. under Type Mark. and on the Options Bar. . and then OK. click Apply. enter W14. click Edit/New.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 22 Click the structural label. for Value. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. and click OK. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. under Label. click . Click Save. click Yes. select the W14X22 beam tag. and. and on the Options bar. under Category Parameters. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. 31 In the Type Selector. Enter Structural Framing Tag . click Edit Family. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. click Edit. 27 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click parameter(s) to a label). click OK. and on the Options Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Type Mark. while pressing CTRL. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. click Load into Projects. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Structural Framing Tag .by Type Mark: Standard. 28 On the Family Design Bar. click OK. You are now in the Family Editor. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. click the W18X40 beam tag.by Type Mark for File name. select the active file.

34 In the Filter dialog. click ■ ■ (Filter). Tagging Beams | 433 .32 Enter ZF. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. Select Structural Framing Tags. 33 On the Options bar. do the following: Click Check None to clear all items.

The new beam tag is applied to all beams. 36 To save your changes. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. 35 In the Type Selector. select Structural Framing Tag .■ Click OK. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click File menu ➤ Save As.by Type Mark: Standard. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and on the Options Bar. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. In the next exercise a new training file is provided. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit Family. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. click Training Files. You are now in the Family Editor.rvt. and on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. click Yes. 40 Click File ➤ Close. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . click Edit Label. expand Structural Plans.NOTE For training purposes. click Beam System Tag. 3 Click the structural label. and double-click Level 2.

do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. select Number of studs. enter C=1/2". for Sample Value. for Prefix. enter W14X22. enter ( (left parenthesis). click . select Top. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. and for Suffix. Under Category Parameters.Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). for Vertical Align. for Sample Value. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. select Camber Size. (Add parameter). Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. Select parameter 2. ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Sample Value. and for Suffix. select Reference Planes. enter ) (right parenthesis). add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. enter S1. for Spaces. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. enter ] (close bracket). and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. select 3. and select Break. Under Visibility. for Prefix. Select parameter 3. enter [ (open bracket). under Graphics. add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. click OK. . 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . expand Structural Plans. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. and click Yes. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. 15 On the Design Bar. In the Reload Family dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. and double-click Level 2. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser.■ Click OK. click Load into Project. click Override parameter values of existing types. 12 Select the text on the beam label. 14 Click Modify.

click ■ . ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. 19 On the Options Bar. do the following: Under Structural. 438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click OK. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Worksets on page 439. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial.

however. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In Revit Structure 2009. click Training Files. they cannot make changes to it. In this tutorial. In the next exercise. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. slabs. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. All other team members can view this workset. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. etc. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. 439 . You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users.Worksets 12 On many building projects. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. beams. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.) is called a workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. Using Worksharing.

Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. a third is assigned all beams and columns. enter Beams and Columns. imagine 5 users including yourself. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. Project Standards. a second user is assigned the roof. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. under Show. In this simple training project. one team member is assigned to the slabs. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). The Worksets dialog is displayed. For training purposes. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. and Views. 7 In the New Workset dialog. 3 In the Worksets dialog. 5 Under Show. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. Therefore. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. clear Families. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. In this case. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. Only User-Created worksets should display. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. For training purposes. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. and notice all are editable by you. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. click New.

enter Slabs. 10 In the Worksets dialog. Click OK. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name.■ Click OK. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. 13 In the New Workset dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. 8 In the Worksets dialog. click New. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. 11 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Click OK. enter Foundation. enter Elevator Shafts. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . 9 In the New Workset dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. click New. click New.

15 In the New Workset dialog. The roof should only be visible in specific views. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. click New. Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. 19 In the New Workset dialog. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. 17 In the New Workset dialog. click New. enter Roof. Again. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name.14 In the Worksets dialog. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. enter Garage Ramp. this improves performance. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. Again. click New. this improves performance.

This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 20 In the Worksets dialog. 27 On the right side of the dialog. click Non Editable.Central. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. enter Worksets Project . 25 In the Worksets dialog. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. The next step is to create the central file. under Show. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for file name. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . 22 In the Save As dialog. NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. Now that you have created the central file. 23 Click Save. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need.

36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. 30 In the Save to Central dialog.Central on the network drive. click OK. and click OK. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. Assigning Worksets on page 445. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 33 Select the file. 28 In the Worksets dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project . and click Open. click File menu ➤ Close. under Comments. and click Save.In the Worksets dialog. 31 After the file is saved. 35 In the Save As dialog. navigate to a folder on your local computer. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets . enter Initial Central File Setup. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Worksets dialog. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member.In this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. and created a local file. 6 Click OK. Assigning Worksets | 445 . you assign the structural columns workset to User1. for Workset. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. you enabled Worksharing on a project. You then created the central file. click . 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. select Beams and Columns. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. checked in all worksets. notice that all worksets are available for editing. 2 Click Cancel.

click .The Worksets dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Select Structural Columns. 12 In the Filter dialog. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 9 Click Cancel. click Check None. under Borrowers for Workset1. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. notice that User1 is listed. and click OK.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Make Elements Editable. 15 On the Options Bar. The puzzle-piece icons disappear. Assigning Worksets | 447 . for Workset. click . but the columns remain highlighted. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable.All structural columns in the model are highlighted. 14 Right-click one of the columns. select Beams and Columns.

18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Click Open. to save the local file. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets .17 Click OK. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. under After save relinguish editable. and click OK. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. clear Borrowed Elements. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.

Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. 8 In the Filter dialog.In the Worksets dialog. select Workset1. 5 Click OK. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. 4 In the Worksets dialog. click Check None. 7 On the Options Bar. click . and select Floors.

10 On the Options Bar.9 Click OK. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. 12 Click OK. select Slabs. click . for Workset. All floors are highlighted.

Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. click . 16 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. 18 Enter VV. select Roof. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. foundation. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Using the steps described in the previous procedure. for Workset. 14 On the Options Bar. assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. and the garage ramp.

clear the box next to the desired element. 22 Enter VV. and Slabs. To turn off additional elements. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click the Worksets tab. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and then click Apply and OK. Roof. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view.20 Clear Beams and Columns. and Slabs. The elements are now visible in the view. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and then click Apply and OK. 23 Check Beams and Columns. Roof.

WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Throughout the process.25 In the Save to Central dialog. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. instructions are staggered. For training purposes. consider that person to be User 1. enter User 2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. If you have not yet completed these exercises. skip the following section. please do so before continuing. and proceed to Create a local copy. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 3 On the Settings menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. one user has already created a local file. each user must check out worksets. and reset the User name to your computer login name. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. This is a system setting. and click OK. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets.rvt. In the following section of this exercise. For training purposes. make elements editable. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Throughout the remainder of this exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. under User name. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. and reload the latest changes. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. two users access the central file through a network connection. return to the Settings dialog. User 2: Create a local file. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. specifically sequenced. 27 Under Comment. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 28 Click OK. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Options.

and click OK. This file is for your use only. You now have a local copy of the project. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. If it is not open. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected.7 In the Open dialog. 15 Select the Foundation workset. select Specify. expand 3D Views. modify the structural model. You are now the owner of that workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 22 Click OK. 8 Click Open. and click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 In the Save As dialog. If you only have one workset checked out. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . open it now. and select Yes for Editable. it becomes the active workset. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and move it. 23 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. In addition. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. under Open Worksets. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 16 Click OK. select the central file and. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. User 1: Check out worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click Save.

27 In the Save to Central dialog. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 28 Click OK. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . select a footing. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. expand 3D Views. and move it. and double-click 3D-Atrium. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide.

any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. Click Yes. 34 Select Roof. and click OK. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. and click OK. The changes User 2 made are apparent. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. the Visible by default option was not selected. 39 On the View menu. However. double-click Roof. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the Project Browser. click Slab. Even though the Roof workset is active. This is because when the Roof workset was created. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. click the Worksets tab. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 38 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. select Yes for Editable. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . Therefore. 37 In the Design Bar. click Pick Supports. select Roof to turn on its visibility. User 1: Reload latest worksets. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets.

select them. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. and click Open. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. As each of you work. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Each user checked out worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. if any User-Created worksets are not open. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. In the final exercise of this tutorial. throughout this training. In subsequent steps.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. 44 Click OK. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. This exercise requires two users and. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. Each user must have network access to the central file. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. In this exercise. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. and these problems are rectified. Check out worksets. 2 In the Worksets dialog. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. There are specific instructions for each user. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. you save the training file as a central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457.

7 Under Active Workset. 9 On the Options Bar. select Foundation. You are now the owner of that workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select the Beams and Columns workset. and click OK. At this point. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Active Workset. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. select a footing. select Beams and Columns. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 6 In the Worksets dialog. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. After you submit the request. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click 3D-Atrium. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. You are now the owner of that workset. expand 3D Views. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests.3 Select the Foundation workset. 11 Move the footing. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and click OK. and select Yes for Editable.

18 Click OK. 16 Click Close. select the request submitted by User 2. click Check Now. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . Project Coordination on page 461. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. to Local. and notice the footing is in the new location. In this multi-user exercise. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. In this case. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click OK. select the following. 15 Click Grant. and the other user granted it. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you requested permission to edit the element.

460 .

In the tutorial. or postponed. In this tutorial. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. Once each change has been reviewed. rejected. reviews each change individually. a warning is displayed. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. Finally. walls. which can be accepted. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. depending on the impact to the design. levels. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. floors. and columns for any future modifications. click Training Files. and the copy monitor feature was activated. 461 . Coordination Review In this lesson. Starting a New Project on page 149. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. Finally. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. Click OK to open the file. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. click Apply. click . and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 7 Enter ZF. double-click Level 3. Click . and then click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. select the Revit Links tab.rvt. 8 On the View Toolbar. and click OK. select Coordination for Discipline. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. under Graphics. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .

click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . and click Wireframe.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. Click to select the linked file. and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click the Model Graphics Style control. On the View Control Bar. . and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. . The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. 10 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select . click as shown.

Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Actions include: Postpone. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. Reject. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. and click Show. select the remaining messages. Accept Difference. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. moved. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. In the Action column. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. These messages identify elements that were deleted. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. and then click Show. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. press SHIFT. or changed in some way from the architect’s file.

do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. and click Show. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Click the message i_RBD_After. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. ■ For Action. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog. select Modify Grid B. and click Apply. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . click . Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window.rvt: Grids: Grid:B.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change.

■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . expand Maintain wall position. For Action. and select the remaining messages. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view.20 In the Coordination Review dialog. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. and click Apply. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. press SHIFT.

In the Coordination Review dialog. Select Postpone for Action. Click the Add Comment field. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. and OK.12" Concrete. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress. Select Postpone for Action. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . enter Need to discuss with architect. Click OK. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 .8" Masonry. In the Edit Comment dialog. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. Click the Add Comment field. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog.rvt. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. click Apply. enter Need to discuss with architect. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation .

Interference Check on page 468. The default table compares elements within the same project.rvt for Categories from. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Interference Check In this exercise. select i_RBD_After.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.24 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. i_RST_Coordination-in progress. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog.

select Structural Columns.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. Interference Check | 469 . Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.

do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. 5 In the Interference Report dialog. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown. 470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project.4 Click OK.

html).There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. Click Export to generate an interference report. enter Columns vs. Stair Check. and that it interferes with the stairway.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread. Click Save. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. Interference Check | 471 . ■ Select i_RBD_After. Each representing a different level. Under File name. select a folder location on your local computer. Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Under Save as type. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. select Revit Interference Report (*.

11 Click OK. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project. 9 In the Interference Check dialog.7 In the Interference Report dialog. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. select i_RBD_After. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . click Close. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project.rvt for Categories from.

Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. Under Save as type.12 In the Interference Report dialog. Select i_RBD_After. Under File name. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . ■ Click Export to generate an interference report. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. enter Brace vs. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. also the brace interferes with the opening. select a folder location on your local computer. do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors. Interference Check | 473 .rvt: Doors: Door Single. Door opening.html). select Revit Interference Report (*.

5 Verify that Issued is cleared. 4 Click on the value for Description. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. In the next lesson. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. This is the date the revisions were identified. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In general. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. When Issued is selected. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. the revision is locked and issued to the field. You can create a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. yet as concise as possible. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Close. If you select By Project. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ Click Save. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. When you use this option. if the active revision is number 1. and enter 2/15/06. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. For example. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. click Training Files. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. a new training file is provided. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. 2 In the Revisions dialog. click Revisions.rvt.

Level 3 Framing Plan. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. 7 Click Apply. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.1 . including revision number and revision date. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise.If Visible is not selected. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Revision clouds have read-only properties. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. and OK. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. However. In most instances. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click near grid line B. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. click Revision Cloud. under Sheets (all). 4 In the drawing area. and select Activate View. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . double-click S. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.

6 Verify that Visible is selected. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. 2 In the Revisions dialog.rvt. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. In this tutorial. the revision is locked and issued to the field.7 On the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. i_RST_Revision-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. click Add: New. When Issued is selected. yet as concise as possible. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. In general. click Revisions. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter 2/20/06. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. 4 Click on the value for Description. click Finish Sketch. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. NOTE At this point.

8 In the drawing area. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. click above the elevator shaft. 11 On the Design Bar. and enter Research brace. click Revision Cloud.If Visible is not selected. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. In most instances. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. 14 Click on the value for Description. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2/21/06. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. click Add: New. 13 Click on the value for Release Date. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table.

allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. In most instances. When Issued is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. click above the brace. under Sheets (all). 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. yet as concise as possible. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.2 . click Revision Cloud. double-click S. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser.In general. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. and select Activate View. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .Stair Shafts Sections. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. If Visible is not selected. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared.

The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. and enter Research door. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 26 Click on the value for Description. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. click Add: New.23 On the Design Bar. 28 Verify that Visible is selected. click Finish Sketch. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . When Issued is selected. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. and enter 2/22/06. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. In general. the revision is locked and issued to the field. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. yet as concise as possible.

The revision cloud is displayed around the door. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. under Sheets (all). click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. double-click S. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click above the door. 32 In the drawing area. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. i_RST_Revision-in progress. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Stair Shafts Sections. click Finish Sketch. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet.If Visible is not selected. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 35 On the Design Bar.2 . In most instances. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination .rvt. and select Activate View.

Level 3 Framing Plan. under Sheets (all). the tag is displayed inside the cloud. and then issue the revisions to create a record. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to place the tag. double-click S. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_RST_Revision-in progress. and lock it from further changes. 4 On the Options Bar. and because the revision is the first in the project.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Working with Revisions | 481 . 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Working with Revisions In this exercise. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. clear Leader.1 . allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet.rvt. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 5 In the drawing area. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. Working with Revisions on page 481. and select Activate View. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. Because you chose to number by sheet. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

3 In the Project Browser. click Revisions. you can no longer modify it. double-click S. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . On the Settings menu. under Sheets (all). Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.Level 3 Framing Plan. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. You do this by issuing the revision. 2 Select .1 .View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). you prevent further changes to the revision. double-click S. NOTE After you issue a revision. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. and click OK. 4 Select .Stair Shafts Sections.2 . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.

Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485. Working with Revisions | 483 .7 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 Proceed to the next tutorial. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.

484 .

Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. the template is still applied to the 3D view. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. Discipline. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. geometry. For example. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. if you save a template from a plan view. To update a view. As you create objects and the physical model. quantity take off. The physical model that is used for documentation. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. material properties. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. 485 . you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. Detail level. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. you can reapply the modified template. Views and View Templates are not linked. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. The analytical model consists of structural components. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. component properties. loads and load combinations. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. When working with the analytical model.

you learn how to check member supports. 2 In the Select View Template dialog. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below.Analytical Checks In this exercise. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown.

under the Analytical Model Settings tab. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. or isolated). applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. 4 In the Warning dialog click . 5 Close the Warning dialog. Analytical Checks | 487 . wall.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. to view each warning. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports.

488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show.

The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show. Analytical Checks | 489 . Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing.

D-2. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. double-click Ground Level. Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. 14 On the Design bar. click Modify. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. and H-4. E-3. under Structural Plans. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. D-4. click Close.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. H-3. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Warning dialog. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. expand 3D Views. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. click to view each warning. 4 Close the Warning dialog. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. and double-click 3D. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. 3 In the Warning dialog. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 .

7 In the Warning dialog. click . In the Element Properties dialog. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. under Analytical Model.■ ■ Click Show. and on the Options Bar. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Close. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.

11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown. Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit). and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. click OK. Analytical Checks | 493 .9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Press CTRL.

18 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 Under Analytical Model. for Top Vertical Projection. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected.13 On the Options Bar. a new training file is provided. Load Cases on page 494. click . 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. click OK. The Warning dialog does not appear. In the next exercise. select Top of Column. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. you edit and add load cases. You can save the open file if you wish. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed.

and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. 3 Click Add. select the Load Cases tab. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. then click Duplicate. and rename it to Roof Hung. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. In this table. 2 Click Add. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. select Dead Loads. you add. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. you learn how to add new load cases. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. The selected load case is copied in the table.rvt. Load Cases | 495 . 5 Under Category. edit. or delete load cases.The first table is the Load Cases table. In this table. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The second table is the Load Natures table. In this exercise. you add or delete load natures. Select an existing load case record in the table. Revit Structure provides a default number. click Training Files. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table.

The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. expand 3D Views. and enter an appropriate name. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt. In this exercise. and loads can be placed by default. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . using the project coordinate system. you will be adding dead loads.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. live loads. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane.Analytical. A host for a load has its own work plane. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click View 1 . and wind loads to the model. Hosts include slabs and beams. expand Views (all).

under Analytical Model. . click (Area Load). 9 Click the garage sloped slab. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. click the Model Graphics Style control. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. and click OK.2 On the View Control Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Loads. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. 5 On the Options Bar. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Select .

click Modify. expand Structural Plans. click 13 Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. 10 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Project for Orient to. under Structural Analysis. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 11 Select the load. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. and double-click Level 2-Analytical. expand Views (all). . click (Area Load). 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Loads. Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser.

Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. select Area Load: Area Load 1. and click OK. double-click Level 2-Analytical.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. 4 In the Type Selector. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 . 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. under Structural Plans. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. click Loads. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. enter -0. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. click (Line Load). click Duplicate. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option.11 On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. enter Wind Load. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.

and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. expand 3D Views.Analytical. and double-click View 1 . 20 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser.Analytical in order to view the added loads.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. expand Views (all). double-click Level 2 . 19 On the View Control Bar. 21 Select . under Structural Plans. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . and click Hidden Line. draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown.

22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. click Grid. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

and will be deleted in a later step.This grid is drawn for reference only. 26 On the Design bar. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. click Modify. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . 27 Select the temporary grid. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. 29 Select . and press DELETE. The elevation view opens. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. click Framing Elevation.

and on the Options Bar. click Loads. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. and click OK. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 On Level 2. click . select Workplane for Orient to. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. click (Line Load). 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. as shown. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. 34 Select the load. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. under Structural Analysis.

You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. Load Combination In this exercise. 10 Under Case or Combination.4.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. select DL1. 4 Under Name. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. select LL1. enter DL+LL. 7 Under Case or Combination. Load Combination on page 505. Load Combination | 505 . 6 Under Factor.6. enter 1. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. 9 Under Factor. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. enter 1.rvt. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 8 Click Add. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. click Structural Settings. and click Add.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click the Load Combinations tab. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

23 Select Row 2. 17 Under Factor. 20 Under Factor. enter DL+LL+WIND. select DL1. select LL1. 21 Under Case or Combination. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . select WIND1.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. 24 Under Type. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. select Envelope. enter 1.5. and click Add. select Ultimate. 15 Under Case or Combination. enter 0.3. 14 Under Factor. 12 Under Name. and enter 1. 25 Under State. and click Add. 18 Under Case or Combination.2. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. 22 Click on the Load Combination table.

Transfer Project Standards on page 507. select the file that contains the load table. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Transfer Project Standards | 507 . 28 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Click Check None. and select Load Types. Scroll down the list of items. click OK. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards.26 In the Structural Settings dialog.

click the Load Combinations tab. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 6 On the Structural Settings dialog.■ Click OK. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Overwrite.

Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. and creating an analytical schedule. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. expand Views (all). i_RST_SAM3-in progress.The load combinations are displayed. and double-click Level 2 Analytical. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. you document the analysis by adding an annotation. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. expand Structural Plans. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Modify. 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. 5 On the Design Bar.

Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. 11 Using the same process. select Line Loads and click OK. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. right-click on the Design Bar. 10 Under Available fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and click View. select Fx 1 and click Add.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

13 Click OK. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.3. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project.rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser.Analytical. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. under Structural Plans. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. In addition. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F . 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Ground Level . For this reason. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 .3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. 4 Press TAB. 5 Press TAB. and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab.

The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. In the next exercise. a new training file is provided. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. You can save the open file if you wish. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. For example.

despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined.Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members. the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 .

and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 3 Click OK.

5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown. double-click Level 2. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . click as shown. 2 On the Toolbar. 4 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. . click . and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

The dot located at the top of the beam. select Top of Slab. under Analytical Model. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click the beam. 8 Click the slab. and on the Option Bar. for Vertical Projection. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . for Vertical Projection. click . and then click OK. For demo purposes. under Analytical Model. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. select Auto-detect. click .

11 On the Toolbar. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3.Analytical. double-click Level 2 . The dot located at the top of the slab.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. click . and click Zoom in Region. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 . 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. right-click. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area.

Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click . under Analytical Model. 18 On the Toolbar. and then click OK. select Auto-detect. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. click . The horizontal projection plane for the column. and on the Option Bar. double-click Level 2. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. for Horizontal Projection. select the wall. 16 On the Tools toolbar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Join Geometry). The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. and then select the column.14 Click the column.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.

Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. 21 Press TAB. 22 On the Option Bar. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and then click OK. click . under Analytical Model. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. select Auto-detect. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. for Horizontal Projection.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. for Horizontal Projection.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. click . under Analytical Model. 26 Click the upper wall. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . and then click OK. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. and on the Option Bar. and click Zoom in Region. right-click. select Plane 1.

double-click Section 3. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column. right-click. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and click Zoom in Region.The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section).

34 In the Element Properties dialog.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. for Vertical Projection. click . for Top Vertical Projection. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. and on the Option Bar. 31 Click the lower wall. click . under Analytical Model. The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. and then click OK. select Auto-detect. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. select Bottom of Slab. under Analytical Model. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . and on the Option Bar.

select Exterior Face. for Horizontal Projection. 42 Click the lower wall. click . select Auto-detect. double-click Section 3. and then click OK. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). for Analytical Slab Edge. under Analytical Model.Analytical. click No. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . and then click Open View. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 40 On the Design Bar. 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and on the Option Bar.The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. and on the Option Bar. 35 Click the slab. click . 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. and then click OK. 36 In the Go to View dialog. under Analytical Model. 38 On the Option Bar. In the Revit dialog. click .

click . click . under Analytical Model. and then click OK. select Top of Wall.The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. and then click OK. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. and on the Option Bar. and on the Option Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Vertical Projection. 46 Click the lower wall. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . 47 In the Element Properties dialog. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. under Analytical Model.

and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. 52 On the Toolbar. 49 Enter ZF. Close any additional open windows. Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. double-click Level 3 .Analytical. double-click Level 3. click .

and on the Option Bar. . and then click OK.53 Click the beam. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. 55 In the Level 3 window. select Auto-Detect. and select the beam shape handle. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . Press TAB. for Horizontal Projection. Extend each end of the beam as shown. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam.

a new training file is provided. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. 530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . In the next exercise. Boundary Conditions on page 531. 56 Click File menu ➤ Close.Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged.

clear Structural Foundation. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. and click Zoom in Region. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. click (Point Boundary Condition). 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Boundary Conditions | 531 . and then click OK. and click Zoom in Region. 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition.Boundary Conditions In this exercise. and for State. right-click. under Visibility. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar. click Boundary Conditions. select Fixed. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area.rvt. double-click View 1 . 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Apply. 2 Enter ZF. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Analytical. right-click. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns.

532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . press CTRL.12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. for State. click . select Pinned. 14 On the Option Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the other symbol. and then click OK. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. under Structural Analysis.

21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition. select Pinned. and for State. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. 20 On the Options Bar. click . Boundary Conditions | 533 . 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. click Boundary Conditions.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. click (Line Boundary Condition). and draw a zoom box around the foundation. 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Toolbar.

sections. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. You can save the open file if you wish. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . that you confirm in the analysis software. For more information. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. All views. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. member relocation. or member addition. elevations. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. are imported back into Revit Structure. a new training file is provided. including structural plans.22 Click File menu ➤ Close. and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. via an Application Programming Interface (API). In the next exercise. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. The application programming interface (API) starts. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial.

In this tutorial. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand 3D Views. section.Atrium. Revit Structure. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. and double-click 3D . maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects.). sheet. You can export a 2D view (plan. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. or schedule into AutoCAD. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally. you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images.rvt. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. etc. 535 .

select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. The existing file name is automatically shortened. ■ ■ Click Options. select a folder on your local computer. 4 In the Export Options dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. 3 In the Export dialog. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). click Short.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats.dwg). Under Save as type. Under File naming.

View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . 5 On the Export dialog.■ ■ Under Prefer. click Save. 8 Navigate to the file location. and click Open. Click OK. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.

and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . the Revit Structure model appears as shown. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. beams. Revit Structure columns. click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. 11 In Revit Structure. 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select a beam as shown.

Under File naming. i_RST_Export-in progress. and double-click Level 2. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . 3 In the Export dialog. select a folder on your local computer. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. Under Save as type.dwg). 1 In the Project Browser. clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. expand Structural Plans. Click Save.rvt. Under File name. click Long (Specify prefix for all exports). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise.

i_RST_Export-in progress.If the view was set to wireframe. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.rvt. a warning dialog appears. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Navigate to the file location. click Hidden Line Removal. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. On the View’s export mode dialog. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. 8 In Revit Structure. and click Open. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .

2 In the Export dialog. 4 On the Export dialog.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. click Save. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. clear Views. Select each sheet. and click OK. select a folder on your local computer. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. Under Export Range. Exporting Sheets | 541 . you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in.

7 Click File menu ➤ Open.If the view was set to wireframe. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file. and click Open. On the View’s export mode dialog. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. click Hidden Line Removal. a warning dialog appears. If you wish to save the changes. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .

they appear as shown.When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture. Exporting Sheets | 543 .

544 .

and roofs are examples of these types of families. because there is only one file to track. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. In this tutorial. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . 545 . exceptions to this rule. The different file types become much easier to manage. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. You also learn about the Family Editor. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. each with a different size. shape. thus the term family. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. In addition. Walls. In this lesson. however. they are still related and come from a single source. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. and when and how to use it. material set. Using the Family Editor. Even though various types within a family can look different.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based.rfa extension. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. For example. There are. such as a curved beam.

Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. The basic walls system family. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. while many more are stored in component libraries. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. and beam. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and roofs. exterior. foundation. for example. but you cannot create new system families. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. Standalone families include columns. generic. floors. and partition wall styles. has wall types that define interior. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Host-based families have components that require hosts. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates.

Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. for example. Introduction to Families | 547 . The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. You can load them into projects. custom step footing. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. You create in-place families only within the current project. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. transfer them from one project to another. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. and also a standalone pile cap family component.

To add a family to your project.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. After the family has been loaded in the project. However. or you can load it using the Load From Library. you learn when to use the Family Editor. such as plan. elevation. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. if you change the original family. how to access it. In this exercise. In the final exercise. or 3D. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. and when to use it. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. you learn about the Family Editor. how to access it. In this section. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. it is saved with the project. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. Load Family command on the File menu. you can drag it into the document window. 4 Select the family file name and click Open.

and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 3 Next. 9 Save the newly defined family. you can click File ➤ Open. if you have exhausted your external resources. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. modify it as needed. you will need a specific component for your design. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. Within the Windows® environment. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. To start a new family.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. open it in the Family Editor. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . you can double-click any file with an .When to use the Family Editor During the design process. presume it is a bay window that you require. and click Open. it opens within the Family Editor. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. 5 Finally. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. and then load it into the project. it will be available within the Type Selector. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. such as newsgroups. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. navigate to a family file. If you find a close match. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. select the appropriate template. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. With Revit Structure open. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. When the family opens. and click Open. In this case. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object.

550 .

you create a custom. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. In the second exercise. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. 551 . and an in-place family for a step-footing. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. you create it within the project file. When you create an in-place family. Using the installed templates. not within the Family template (.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. a custom castellated beam. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family.rft file).rft) template for use in other projects. In the first exercise. a custom titleblock. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile.

and press DELETE. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. right-click.rfa. and then click OK. Click Apply. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown. 6 On the View Control Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. click Training Files. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Zoom to Fit. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite.

click Dimension.Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 . and click to place the dimension as shown. Move the cursor inside the profile. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click the angle. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane.

Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. enter 66. and press ENTER. 554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag them approximately as shown. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. and click Zoom to Fit. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. 16 On the View Control Bar. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. right-click.13 Select the angled reference plane. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area.

click Dimension.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. and add a dimension as shown. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE.

26 On the Element Properties dialog. 24 Press ESC. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. click Dimension. and then click OK. under Other. click . click Ref Plane. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. select Not a Reference. Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. 22 On the Design Bar. for Is Reference.

32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. and press ENTER. 31 Select the dimension line. 29 Press ESC. click the dimension. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. and enter 0' 11/32".The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 .

35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. and click Delete Inner Segment. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. 38 Using the split tool.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. 36 Click Modify. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. click Lines. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Press ESC.

click Label ➤ Add Parameter. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 44 On the Options Bar. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . and then click OK. and then click OK. enter b for Name. enter a for Name. under Parameter Data.41 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown.

■ Under Other. and OK. 48 Select the dimension as shown. 47 In the Family Types dialog. for a. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 2" X 6".Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 4 1/2". 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Label. 49 On the Options Bar. for wr. Under Other. Click Apply. click Family Types. enter 0' 2". click Family Types. and select wr. do the following.

The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. click Slab. 64 On the Design Bar. Under Other. click Finish Sketch. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. enter 0' 5". select Structural Analysis-Default. and for File Name. 68 On the Design Bar. You are now in sketch mode. for b. enter 0' 2 1/2". click Browse. in the Imperial Templates folder. 52 On the Toolbar. and click Save. enter 0' 2".■ ■ Under Other. 57 In the Family Types dialog. enter 0' 2 1/2". for b. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . 58 Click File ➤ Save. click the Imperial Library folder. 66 On the Options Bar. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. do the following. Under Other. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Under Family Types. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder.rfa. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. and enter 2" x 5". 63 In the Project Browser. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. for a. 60 In the New Project dialog. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. select Rename. click OK. and then click OK. Under Other. and click Open. click (Rectangle). Click Apply. double-click Level 2. for Sr. click Lines. under Structural Plans. 62 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters.rte. click Family Types. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 65 On the Design Bar. Click Apply.

562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. For Model Graphic Style. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown.The slab is created. click Section. 73 On the View Control toolbar. 72 Select the slab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). and in the Type Selector. double-click Section 1. select 1" = 1' 0". Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. select Fine. select Wireframe. 71 In the Project Browser. For Detail Level.

81 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK.rvt. 82 In the Project Browser. select Layer 3. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. If there are multiple files open. select the slab project from the available files. select Edit for Structure. The new profile is applied to the slab. select the new metal deck profile file. under Construction. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. 75 On the Families Design Bar. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. click OK. Under Layers. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Structural Deck Properties. 76 Select the slab. double-click Section 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. and open the new family file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. open the file from the saved folder location. for Deck profile. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. under Sections. click Edit/New. click OK. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . click Load into Project. If it is not. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ . click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. do the following. The file should still be open. 80 In the Type Properties dialog.

4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown. . dt1 = Tee depth top beam. . ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. click castellated beam. e2 = Space between voids (web post length). click 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. b = Length of sloped portion. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. and on the Options Bar. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. click Edit/New.

rft. For b. enter 0' 4". and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. enter 0' 5 1/2". Click Apply. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565. For dt1. enter 0' 3". For dt2. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For e2. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. under Construction. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. enter 0' 3". Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. click Rebar Lines. enter 0' 6".

click ■ (Draw). as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . ■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line. and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar.4 On the Options Bar. ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar.

Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Dimension. 8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . 6 On the Design Bar. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop.

568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Press ESC. Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown. select B. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. 11 On the Options Bar.Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. for Label.

16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown.13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. select D. select C. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 . for Label. for Label.

Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. 24 In the New Project dialog. 18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder. enter Square. select Structural Analysis-Default. for Label. click Browse. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. select C. for File name. and click Open. in the Choose Template dialog. select B. 19 On the Options Bar. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Label. 26 In the New Project dialog. click OK. and click Save. 22 In the Save As dialog.17 On the Options Bar.rte.

Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . You are now in Sketch mode. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. The active rebar shape is highlighted.27 In the Project Browser. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. and select Rebar Shape: Square. click Lines. double-click Level 2. 32 On the Design Bar. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. The file should still be open. 30 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. select the new project. open the file from the saved folder location. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. click (Rectangle). 29 On the Design Bar. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. and be certain that the Square. and click OK. The slab is created. click Slab. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Finish Sketch. 34 On the Families Design Bar.rfa file is open. If it is not. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

39 In the Type Selector. 40 Hover over the section view. for Placement Plane. select Rebar Bar: #10. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. 44 Select the rebar. select Near Cover Reference.38 On the Options Bar. 42 Click ESC. 41 Click to place the rebar. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Detail Level: Fine.

Creating In-Place Families | 573 . Creating In-Place Families on page 573. click Modify. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown. you start with an incomplete foundation wall.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear.rft) template. 46 On the Design Bar.

click Foundation ➤ Wall.36" x 12". 6 On the Options Bar. The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. click . 4 Click the foundation wall. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 3 In the Type Selector. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown.

enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. 12 Press TAB. and select the bearing footing as shown. select Pick a plane. and click OK. click Create. 9 In the Name dialog. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Foundations. and click OK. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . Make sure the entire footing is selected. and click OK.

click Extrusion Properties. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. click the value for Material. for Name.Cast-in-Place Concrete. click Finish Sketch. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Family. for Depth. 16 On the Design Bar. and select Multiple. select Concrete . click . 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. click Modify. click OK. 22 On the Family Design Bar. enter -3' 0". sketch a solid extrusion as shown. 19 In the Materials dialog. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. and then click OK.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. under Materials and Finishes. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 . 27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown.

click (Join Geometry). Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown.28 Press ESC. 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Multiple Join.

37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown. and click Multiple Join.33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . click (Join Geometry). click Modify.

40 In the Project Browser.38 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 39 Press ESC. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. select D .Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. 2 In the New dialog. and enter -1/2" for Offset. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. The titleblock has linework. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and labels. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. and click Open. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. graphics. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. 4 On the Options Bar.rft.36 x 24. and your project data. text. click . click Lines. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.

. 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. and click to draw a new vertical line. 8 On the Options Bar. click . and click . 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. click 9 Enter 0 for Offset.

click Lines. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. select the second and third horizontal lines. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . 18 On the Options Bar.13 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. and. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 22 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 14 In the Type Selector. enter 3/4" for Offset. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. click Modify. while pressing CTRL. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. click . 26 On the Design Bar.

10 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/8" for Text Size.The titleblock linework is now complete. select Company Logo. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Edit/New. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. under Text. 4 Zoom in on the logo. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog. and click Open. 2 In the Open dialog. 11 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 3/8" Bold for Name. you add a company logo. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and labels to your titleblock. text notes. click Import/Link ➤ Image. and select Bold. navigate to Training/Common. click . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. click Text.jpg.

click Modify. Press ENTER to add each new line of text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and add an address and phone number as shown. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 17 On the Design Bar. and select the last text note. select Text: Text Note 1. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . in the text box. and drag the text note down as shown.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text.

25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. Add consultant name. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Text. click .19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and select the consultant text note. address. 24 On the Options Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

33 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. enter 3/16" for Text Size. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. and click to specify the first copied text note position. and click to specify the second copied text note location. 29 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 3/16" for Name. click . 34 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. and enter Sheet Number. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 In the Name dialog. click Text. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 .26 Move the cursor down 4''. select Text: 3/16". 30 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. click Edit/New.

Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Drawn By:. 41 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. click Label. and enter Date.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Checked By:. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. select Project Issue Date.

51 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Label. 52 In the Type Properties dialog.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. enter 3/8" for Text Size. 50 On the Options Bar. enter 3/8" Label for Name. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . 54 In the Type Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Duplicate. 53 In the Name dialog. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Drawn By. 55 Click OK twice. under Text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. click Edit/New. select Checked By.

select Label: 3/8'' Label. 59 On the Options Bar.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Sheet Number. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. select Project Number. and click OK. click Center and Middle. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click OK. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

72 In the Type Properties dialog. click . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . 73 Click OK twice. select Project Name. and click OK. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. 75 On the Options Bar. enter 1/16" Label. click Edit/New. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select File Path. Click Modify. 78 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Client Name. and click to specify the label location. and select any labels that may need to be moved. and click to specify the label location. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Label. 71 In the Name dialog. 68 On the Options Bar. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. click Duplicate.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. click Left and Middle. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 1/16" for Text Size. so that they are all aligned. and click OK. select 1/16” Label. 69 In the Element Properties dialog.

rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. 7 Click OK. under Other.rfa file. enter Name for Drawn By. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and then click OK. click . Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. select Training D-Size Titleblock. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Modify. and select the titleblock. select it. The titleblock graphics.rfa. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. text. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. click Sheet. 5 In the Open dialog. click Load. and labels are now complete. 2 In the New Project dialog. verify that default. and click Open.

Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . 14 Click OK. click Project Information. For Project Number. enter 2005-01. For Project Status. For Client Name. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. enter Jane Smith. 2005. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Name. enter January 1.12 On the Settings menu. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Office Building. enter In Progress.

594 .

and web members. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. under Structural Plans. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. double-click Roof. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. 595 . Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial.rvt. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. bottom chord. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To use the Truss tool. click Training Files. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord.

select Howe Flat Truss: Standard.2 On the View toolbar. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. 5 On the Options Bar. for Truss Height. click ■ ■ ■ . click . enter 6' 0". Under Dimensions. 9 On the View toolbar. select Top. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. Click OK. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 4 In the Type Selector. do the following: Under Structural. click . and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Bearing Chord. click Truss.

The truss is placed between the columns. delete the extra flange at column location A1. Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . 11 Press DELETE. 12 Using the same method.

598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click (Copy). under Structural Plans. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View toolbar. select Multiple. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. double-click Roof. 16 On the Options bar.

19 On the Design Bar. double-click Roof. Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View toolbar. 25 On the View toolbar. select the remaining trusses. click . 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2.18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). click (Copy). Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . under Structural Plans. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Modify.

select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. click 29 Enter ZF. click Modify. click Truss. 28 On the View toolbar. Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. 27 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Selector. . 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . 34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown. for Bearing Chord.32 On the Options Bar. select Top. Under Dimensions. do the following: Under Structural. Click OK. enter 6' 0". for Truss Height. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown.

37 Using the same method. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click 39 Enter ZF.36 Enter ZF.D4. . and D1.C4. add trusses between columns C1. 38 On the View toolbar.

Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 . and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss. click shown .Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar.

In the next exercise. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. and repeat for the remaining trusses. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. You can save the open file if you wish. Under Bottom Chords. for Structural Framing Type.500. and click OK. for Angle. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters. a new training file is supplied. click Truss. 6 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Training Files. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click . 2 In the Type Selector. enter 90. 44 Using the same method. 3 On the Options Bar.500.rvt. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. enter Howe Flat Truss .Short Span. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. for Structural Framing Type. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. Under Diagonal Webs.42 Press DELETE. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Click OK. click Edit/New.

11 In the Type Selector. click select the truss as shown. 13 On the View toolbar. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. The truss changes to the new type. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . click OK. double-click 3D. under 3D Views.8 In the Element Properties dialog. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web.Short Span. 10 On the View toolbar. . change the remaining short trusses to the new type. 12 Using the same method. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. . click 14 Enter ZF.

21 In the Type Properties dialog.500. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. and click OK. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 17 On the Options Bar.500.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click select the truss as shown. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. for Structural Framing Type. enter Howe Flat Truss . under 3D Views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. click OK. click Truss. click Duplicate. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. 20 In the Name dialog. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View toolbar. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D. . 19 In the Type Properties dialog. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. 16 In the Type Selector. click . Under Diagonal Webs.Roof Span. click Edit/New. for Structural Framing Type.

The truss changes to the new type.NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange.Roof Span. . 26 Using the same method. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . change the remaining long trusses to the new type. 27 On the View toolbar. click 28 Enter ZF. 25 In the Type Selector.

and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. click Training Files. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. and then select the truss as shown. a new training file is supplied.rvt. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. click . 2 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . You can save the open file if you wish. draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 3D. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof.

3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. (Attach/Detach Top Chord). Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. All instances of the truss will be highlighted. Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . click 5 Select the roof as shown.

and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. You can save the open file if you wish. click . click Modify. 8 On the View Control Bar. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof.The top chords. 6 On the Design bar. In the next exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. 9 On the View toolbar. vertical webs. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. a new training file is supplied. 10 On the View Control Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. click Dimension. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 . click Ref Plane. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown.rvt.rft located in the Imperial folder. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. click the Training Files icon. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown.

10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the same method. click Truss Top Chord. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown.

click Truss Web. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown.11 On the Design Bar. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . Truss Bottom Chord.

Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 17 On the Design Bar.16 Using the same method. and click OK. enter Custom_Truss.rvt. You are now in the project file. For Save as type. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. Click OK. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. select Family Files (rfa). click Load into Projects. 19 In the Save As dialog. For File name. navigate to a folder of your choice. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. click Modify.

double-click 3D. double-click Level 2. 23 On the Design Bar.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 27 In the Project Browser. click Truss. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. under Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . 24 In the Type Selector. select Custom_Truss. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown.

select Structural Analysis-Default. You can save the open file if you wish.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK. you add braces to form the steel truss. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog. in the Imperial Templates folder.rte. a new training file is supplied. under Structural Plans. click Grid. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . double-click Level 2. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. In the next exercise. create column grids. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Finally. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and a framing elevation.

click Ref Plane. and press ENTER. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown. and place approximately as shown. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . enter 5' 0". under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. click Framing Elevation. click Structural Column.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. double-click Elevation 1 .) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol. 17 Click the dimension. 15 On the Design Bar. (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 9 Select each grid line. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 .a. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser.

19 Click the dimension. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 22 Press ESC. 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. and enter 15' 0".

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 . click Beam. 27 Enter 7 for array count. click . and press ENTER.24 On the Tools toolbar. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. 26 Drag the array to the right. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. The array is complete.

click Brace. click truss as shown. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . When placing braces. . make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. When placing beams. 33 In the Type Selector. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. select 3D Snapping. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown.30 On the Tools toolbar. 31 Using reference planes as a guide. Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

36 On the Design Bar. click . click Ref Plane. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . then select the edge of the top chord as shown. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. 38 On the Tools toolbar. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown.

under 3D Views. double-click 3D. View the truss 41 In the Project Browser. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown.

42 Click File menu ➤ Save. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 . 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice.The completed truss is displayed. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial.

624 .

For example. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). After you and the client agree on the final design. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. At any time in the design process. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In addition. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Using design options.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. and each option set can have multiple schemes. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 625 . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this tutorial. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have multiple sets of design options.

Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. TIP In this exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you can edit it. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.In this particular case. you design each of the structural options. each with multiple design options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. After you create a design option. the only available command is to create a new option set. 2 In the Design Options dialog. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. each is constructed for interchangeability. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the left pane of the Open dialog. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. In the first exercise in this lesson. therefore. make your final design decision. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. and delete the unwanted options from the project. the roof and structure systems must work together. In the second exercise. you set up multiple design option sets. In the final exercise of this lesson. click Training Files. The client has asked you to create various options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project.rvt. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. under Option Set. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). click New. With the second option. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you learn how to manage and organize the design options.

5 On the View menu. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click Edit Selected. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns.3 Select Option 1 (primary). expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Type Selector. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. expand Views (all). add three columns. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. and click Close. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and the third column centered between the two. In the following illustration. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 4 In the Project Browser. By selecting Multiple. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . 11 On the Edit toolbar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. In this case. click Modify. click Column. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. click 12 On the Options Bar. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. select: ■ ■ ■ . the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. TIP To center the middle column. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction.

A copy of the three selected columns is added. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. When you are finished. 18 On the View toolbar. they are difficult to see in this view. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. Because of the size of the columns.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . using the same technique. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 17 Zoom out and.

click Beam. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE. Next. 21 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. In it. Zoom in on the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. you add the beams that span the columns.Notice the 12 columns that you added. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click Modify. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. under Floor Plans. The first click specifies the beam start point. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . select Round Bar : 2". Use the following illustration as a guide. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The second click specifies the end of the beam. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Adding a beam is a two-click process. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.

25 On the Edit toolbar. and click the center point. 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Zoom out. select: ■ ■ ■ . click . zoom into the left column. and select the center of the column to add a copy. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns.

46 Under Option. select Option 1 (primary). and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog. click New. click Rename. not a new option set. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option Set. under Option. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 40 In the Rename dialog. under Option. 45 Under Roofing. and click OK. 37 Select Option 2 and. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. and click OK. and click OK. click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 41 Under Option Set. enter Brackets for New. and click OK. click New. 36 In the Rename dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Rename. click New. under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . There should now be two roofing design options. under Option Set. click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. enter Roofing for New. name the option Louvers. enter Structure for New. enter Beam for New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 43 In the Rename dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option.

under Structure. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 48 Under Option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. 52 Click Close.47 Under Roofing. select Option 2. name the option Sunscreen. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Beam. select Edit Selected. 51 Under Edit. and click OK. 53 In the Project Browser. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . Under Now Editing. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. click Rename. double-click ROOF TERRACE. you create the second design option. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. it will resemble the following illustration. When finished. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. under Floor Plans.

The second click represents the plane that is moved. click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 58 On the Tools menu. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. select Roof Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . 56 In the Type Selector. click Align. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.

on the Edit toolbar. 61 On the Design Bar.60 After aligning the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click Modify. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The first click sets the move start point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The second click represents the move end point. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .

70 On the File menu. name the file. click Finish Editing. you need this file in its current state.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 66 On the View toolbar. 68 In the Design Options dialog. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 67 On the Tools menu. i_Urban_House-in progress. click . That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. which is visible by default. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . click Save As. and click Save.rvt. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 69 Click Close. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 8 In the Type Selector. open it now. 3 In the Design Options dialog. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. The first option. 4 Under Edit. select Rafter 2 x 10. delete them after the rafter is in place. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Under Now Editing. do so now. 5 Click Close. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. each with multiple design options to pick from. you design each of the roofing options. In the next exercise. a Louver system. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. the other for beams. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. With the second option. 2 On the Tools menu. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial.In this exercise. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. The second roofing system. Sunscreen. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. expand Views (all). is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. select Louvers (primary). 10 Referring to the following illustration. click Component. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. click Edit Selected. under Roofing. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. If you need to add dimensions.rvt. you set up multiple design option sets. 6 In the Project Browser. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.

click Array. Select Constrain. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. enter 38' 6" for Length. click Modify. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 16 On the Options Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . Select 2nd for Move To. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 5 for Number.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Edit menu. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. under Other.

and press ENTER. when the listening dimension displays. rather than entering 3' 3". For example. TIP When entering a dimension value. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. The space separates feet and inches. you can enter 3 3.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 3' 3". Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .

and press Enter. when the listening dimension displays. 25 With the louver still selected. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. enter 1’. click the Edit menu. under Other. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Enter 34 for Number. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click Component. 23 On the Options Bar. and select the louver you just placed. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. select Louver 2 x 6. and. Select 2nd for Move To. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 20 In the Type Selector. and click Array. 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Select Constrain. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 For the array starting point.

Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 29 On the View toolbar. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Edit. 31 In the Design Options dialog. click . 30 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system is complete. click Finish Editing.

This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. click Properties. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and then click Close. You will fix this in a later step. click Lines. select Sunscreen. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. Click OK. 33 Under Editing. Therefore. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and the third point defines the arc. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. then you can modify it through the dimension. In this case. 39 On the Design Bar. click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. and click OK. and double-click West. the top of the next column on the right. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 40 On the Options Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. expand Elevations. under Roofing. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 43 On the Design Bar. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. click Edit Selected. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 .Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 41 Select the top of the left column. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views.

45 Click OK. The arcs should connect.44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. click Trim/Extend. The second roofing system. 46 On the Tools menu. 48 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Tools menu. click Save. a Louver system. Select the right arc. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. Under Constraints. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. under Edit. Under Constraints. The first option. you designed each of the roofing options. Sunscreen. In this exercise. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. click Finish Editing. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 52 On the File menu. then the center arc. click Finish Sketch. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. The louver roof system is complete. 49 On the View toolbar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. and then click Close. 51 In the Design Options dialog. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. you need this file in its current state. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. click . You have completed the sunscreen roof system.

under Views (all). you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and delete the discarded design options. expand 3D Views. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. enter Primary Option. make it part of the building model. click Visibility/Graphics. Managing Design Options | 643 . do so now. click Visibility/Graphics. and last options. After exploring the combinations. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 On the View menu. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. secondary. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click Duplicate. 11 On the View menu. tertiary. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.Managing Design Options In this exercise. 9 Click OK. double-click Secondary Option. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. under Views (all). If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and click Rename. you select a design. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. right-click {3D}. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. click the Design Options tab. double-click Primary Option. under Views (all). and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.

click Visibility/Graphics. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . double-click Last Option. under Views (all). 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 On the View menu.

click Delete. 25 Select Structure. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. In this case. click Yes. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 26 Under Option Set. Because the client has selected the design option. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 30 Under Option Set. the beam option becomes part of the model. An alert is displayed. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 29 Select Roofing. double-click Primary Option. 22 On the Tools menu. since you no longer need them. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. In your design options. Managing Design Options | 645 . This was the client choice for structural. select Make Primary. click Close. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. select Beam. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Yes. the current primaries are no longer options. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views.At this point. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. under Structure. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 31 In the alert dialog. 27 In the alert dialog. The set is deleted. 24 Under Option. click Accept Primary. but should be accepted as part of the building model.

In this exercise. 35 On the File menu. made it part of the building model. you selected a design. After exploring the combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Save.

performance. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In these situations. Comparison of alternatives on a site. You position the building models on the site plan. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In the final lesson. This maximizes efficiency. 647 . A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. modify their visibility. In this tutorial. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and manage the links throughout the project.

This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. modify their visibility. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link two building models to the project. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. and the other is a townhouse. One building model is a condominium. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.

Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. RELATED See the lesson. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . and click OK. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and click Properties. 8 Clear Read-only. Manual . click Open. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.rvt.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. click Training Files. right-click. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Otherwise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. and save the file there. click Open. click Close. with write permission. this option will place the link at a predefined location.■ Auto . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 5 On the File menu. 2 On the File menu. All three files now reside. c_Townhouse. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. this system is not exposed to the user. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. you can do so. Select c_Site. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. This option is grayed out. however. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. c_Condo_Complex. select the three files. Auto . click Save As.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. ■ ■ Manual .Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. and open Common\c_Site. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . 4 On the File menu.

12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 13 Click Open. expand Views (all). The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Notice the blue detail lines. expand Floor Plans. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.■ Click Open. select Auto . For Positioning. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and double-click Level 1.Origin to Origin. 10 In the Project Browser. 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 11 On the File menu.

click (Move). The Move command requires two clicks. 15 On the Edit toolbar.rvt displays in the Type Selector. After you select it. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 16 For the move start point. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 17 For the move endpoint. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The linked model moves as one object. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. After you specify the location to move to.

652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 Click Open. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. select Auto . and select c_Townhouse.Origin to Origin. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.18 On the View menu.

the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate).23 On the Edit toolbar. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. you first specify the rotation start point. In this case. and click to specify the end of the rotation. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 .

27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move). 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.

The Copy command works much like the Move command.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. click (Copy). 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.

NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. under Identity data. click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 34 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Edit menu. click (Default 3D View). for Name. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. enter Townhouse A. and click OK. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 37 On the View toolbar.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. use the Move command to make any adjustments. click Rotate.

you need this project file open and in this view. do so before continuing. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click and hold Orbit. click (SteeringWheels). you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. After linking the files. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. they were placed too low within the site topography. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . If you have not completed the previous exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click Save. 2 On the SteeringWheels. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. When you originally linked the files. In this exercise.38 On the File menu. In the next exercise. In this exercise. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

and click to select the line. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. Click the Revit Links tab. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. and click OK.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface.rvt. To do this. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you first select the plane you want to align to. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. In this case. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. and click to select it. when it highlights. click (Align). you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. under Views (all). 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and then select the plane that you want to align. expand Elevations. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. When using the Align command. 7 On the Tools toolbar. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and double-click South. 3 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. In the steps that follow. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

You have completed this tutorial. under Other. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and click Properties. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 13 On the File menu. select Family and Type for Sort by. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type.8 Click OK. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save. In this exercise. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 Select Grand totals. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. click Close. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. right-click Door Schedule. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the File menu. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. and then click OK twice. clear Itemize every instance. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 .

676 .

You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. In this tutorial. footings. as well as a covered walkway. and then add new building model elements. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. the galleria. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. braces and footings) to phases. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. In the lesson and exercises that follow. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. You create and manage 3 project phases. ■ ■ 677 . Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. In the second exercise.Project Phasing 21 In any project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. For the client. demolish existing construction. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. complete with schedules. You create new phases. You create new phases. and create plan views for each phase. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. a floor slab. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. beams. Using Phasing In this lesson. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. you create new phase-specific views. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. You create new phases for the project timeline. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. After you assign building elements to phases. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. Phasing Your Model | 679 .

3 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. 4 Click Cancel. For example. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. In the Element Properties dialog. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline.rvt. or temporary) are visible in this phase. click Training Files. and double-click Floor. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. under Phasing. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. expand Floor Plans. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. As you add new elements to the building model. expand Views (all). This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. and the Phase Demolished value is None. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. demo. click . existing. Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. When you create a new structural project. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. By default. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. the current phase linework is displayed as black.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. and click OK. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). and double-click 3D. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. is visible in this view. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. on the Project Phases tab. expand 3D Views. so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. Phase 1 (south). There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. existing earlier phases. With the phase Filter set to Show New. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Phasing dialog.7 Click Cancel. 12 Under Insert. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. demo. and Phase 2 (north). 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the New Construction field. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. Phasing Your Model | 681 . or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). click After. click Modify to clear the command.

22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. right-click one of the rectangular footings. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. and click Select All Instances. 20 In the drawing area. 21 On the View Control Bar. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. click Hide/Isolate. and click Hide Object.

walls. click .23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Hide/Isolate. 32 Click OK. This filters out the steelwork. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. The continuous footing foundations. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. and openings. as shown. and click OK. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK. are selected and are displayed in red. under Phasing. select Show All for Phase Filter. under Phasing. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. 29 On the View Control Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. click . Phasing Your Model | 683 . and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 25 In the Filter dialog.

Phase 1 (south) with demolition. 35 On the Options Bar. 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). and Phase 2 (north) project phases. the slab. and the footings north of the galleria. the building is displayed as shown. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . it requires separate plan views for the Existing. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. Because this is a renovation project. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. After you create the views. the walls. under Phasing. 36 In the Element Properties dialog.Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. click .

46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. right-click Copy of Existing. and click OK. enter Phase 1 (south). select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. Phasing Your Model | 685 . Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click OK. right-click Existing. 41 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. click . Because of this time relationship. which will include planned demolition. and click Duplicate. The line style of the new work. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. and click OK. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. enter Existing. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. under Floor Plans. select Existing for Phase. 48 In the Project Browser. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. demo. and click Rename. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. 40 Click No. in phase 1. 50 In the View Properties dialog.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. under Phasing. right-click Floor. and click OK. Because this is a phase-specific view. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. new. 43 In the Rename View dialog. 39 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Existing. under Floor Plans. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. double click Phase 1 (south). In a phase such as Phase 1. 42 In the Project Browser. shows as black. under Floor Plans. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline.

686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . under Demolished. 56 Click OK. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. As you click each wall. Demolished. 59 In the Phasing dialog. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. 53 In the Project Browser. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. under Phasing. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. 61 For the Filter Name. and select Show All for Phase Filter. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. Existing. click Filter 1. Demo Red. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 60 Under Filter Name. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. The default phase filters are displayed. New. In this case. select Overridden. it is displayed as a dashed line. 58 In the Phasing dialog. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. click the Phase Filters tab. click New. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. select the interior walls one at a time.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. and Temporary. under Floor Plans. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 64 Click OK twice. however. double-click Phase 2 (north). and enter Demo Red. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host. demo. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. new or temporary. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

in phase 1. Because you changed the override. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 78 Click OK. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. 71 Name the views Existing. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. Phase 1 (south). shows as black. under Phasing. double-click Phase 1 (south). 79 In the Project Browser. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click View menu ➤ View Properties. the demolished walls are displayed as red.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. under Phasing. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. The line style of the new work. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. under Graphics. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. Because of this time relationship. and click Rename. and Show All for Phase Filter. under Phasing. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. 76 Under Graphics. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. double-click Existing. Phase 2 (north). The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. double-click Phase 1 (south). under 3D Views. select Existing for the Phase value. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 687 . under 3D Views. 68 Click OK. and click OK. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. 81 In the Element Properties dialog.

You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. as well as 2 views of the building model. 86 If you wish to save this file. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. framing.84 Click OK. you create column. In this exercise. 85 Repeat steps 81 . and footing schedules for a single phase of a project.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view.

7 In the New Schedule dialog. Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. select Structural Framing. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 .Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Phase 1 for Name. click Schedule/Quantities. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. click Schedule/Quantities. Click OK.Phase 1 for Name. Enter Columns . You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Enter Framing . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. click the Fields tab. 4 Under Available Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Select Length for Then by. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. click Training Files. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. select Structural Columns. select the following fields.

Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. Next. Clear Itemize every instance. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Enter Footings . select Structural Foundations. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals. and click New Sheet. select the following fields. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Select Grand totals. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. 18 In the Project Browser. Click OK. right-click the new sheet.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click Rename.Structural for Name. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Click OK. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . click OK. 9 Under Available Fields.Phase 1 for Name. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. Click OK. 14 Under Available Fields. enter Phase 1 . click the Fields tab. right-click Sheets (all). select the following fields. click the Fields tab. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By.

drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. 22 Expand Schedules. and click to place them. select each schedule one at a time. and click to place it. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . 21 Under 3D views. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. 23 On the sheet. and click to place it.20 In the Project Browser. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. In this exercise. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. expand Floor Plans. and move the column controls to adjust column width.

692 .

you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 . you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial.

define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. and create the perspective view that you want to render. In this exercise. When you complete these changes. add trees to the building site.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and then render a final exterior view. After you create the perspective view. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. you specify options that define the model environment. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. the pad. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

and open Common\c_Pool_House.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 . View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool. click Training Files.

Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select the wooden screen wall. click Edit/New. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Solid. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. 5 Under Construction. click Replace. for Materials. satin-finished teak. 10 On the Render Appearance tab.Teak.Teak. so you can change the render appearance for the material. Solid. (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall. click Properties). 7 Click OK 3 times.Teak. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wood . The Wood .3 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. 9 In the Materials dialog. click Edit. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for Structure.

You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. select Satin Varnish. click Modify. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click OK. click <By Category>. 19 On the Render Appearance tab. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. 20 Click the Graphics tab. select Broom Straight. click (Element Properties). click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. select the pad. and click . which is using a default material. for Finish. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . 13 Click Update Preview. click Edit/New. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. click Edit. 16 Under Construction. 22 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Materials dialog. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. 21 Click OK 4 times. You do not want the medium gloss finish. and review the material patterns. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. but it is the closest material to what you want.Cast-in-Place Concrete. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. for Finish. and on the Options Bar. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. and click Update Preview. for Structure. for the Structure [1] Material value.11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. select Concrete .

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and click OK. Anodized . 25 In the Materials dialog. enter Metal . 29 On the Render Appearance tab. You create a black anodized aluminum material. review the material appearance (color and pattern). for Name. By selecting this option. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. and click OK. click Replace. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. select Metal . and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog.Aluminum. 30 In the Render Appearance Library.Black. click (Duplicate).Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.Aluminum. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Aluminum Anodized Black.

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog. for Curtain Wall Mullions. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar. Anodized . 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.Black. 35 Click OK twice. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. . and click 34 In the Materials dialog.Aluminum. select Metal . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Region. select the Material value.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and pad). mullions. 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. NOTE The smaller the region.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. the faster the image renders.

select Sunlight from top left. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. for Setting. after the rendering process completes. Under Lighting.rvt. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. for Scheme. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. The higher the quality. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. on the Rendering dialog. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. 44 To display the building model. select Medium. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. the longer the rendering process will take. For Sun. under Display. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. Several quality settings are available. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress. select Exterior: Sun only. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 .42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Show the model.

rvt. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). NOTE For simplicity. imperial components and units are used in this lesson. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . but any type and size can be used. the RPC model is used in the rendering. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. and double-click Site.In a later exercise.

) 6 In the Type Selector. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. they can be loaded from the Content Library.Deciduous : Red Maple . right-click in the Design Bar. (Exact placement is not important. and click Site. and place 2 trees in the project. select RPC Tree . near the walkway. as shown. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. similar to the locations shown. click Site Component.30'. 4 In the Type Selector. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help.

13 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.18'. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. click Rename.42'. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. click Edit/New.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak . 11 In the Rename dialog.7 In the Type Selector. 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and on the Options Bar. for Height. and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.25'. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select RPC Tree . for New.Deciduous : Honey Locust . select RPC Tree . and click OK. enter 18'. enter Honey Locust .

Creating a Perspective View on page 705. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View | 705 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

c_Pool_House_in_progress. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. The perspective view displays.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. click Camera.

and select the crop boundary. Depending on camera placement. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and adjust the field of vision. double-click Site. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. If the camera is not shown in the view. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. under Floor Plans.3 Zoom out. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. in the Project Browser. as necessary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. right-click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. With the camera shown. as shown. Creating a Perspective View | 707 .

9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. 7 In the Rename View dialog.6 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. 10 Save the file. 8 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. enter Exterior .Day to open the view. and click OK. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. double-click Exterior . right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename.Day.

double-click Exterior . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.rvt. and render a daytime view of the exterior. You then duplicate the view. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . under 3D Views. modify render settings.Day.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

select Spring Equinox. click (Show Rendering Dialog). NOTE If a background image is required. You create a location and time for the rendering. select Edit/New. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. and click Render. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. for Sun. enter Spring Equinox . The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. under Lighting. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Medium. 6 Click OK twice.Santa Monica. In this case. 3pm. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 5 In the Rename dialog. 8 Under Quality. 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Sky: Cloudy. You adjust cloud settings as required.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for New. for Setting. under Background. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. and click Rename.

click Desktop.png). click Show the model.9 In the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Show the rendering. After the image is rendered. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. For Files of type. select Portable Network Graphics (*. Click Save. 10 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . click Export.

select the first light. To select a sequential list. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click Render. click New.Day view to Exterior . enter Pool House Lights.Night. on the View Control Bar. add 30 :Sconce Light . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Group Options. for Name. 25 Using the same method. for Name. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. you duplicate the view and change the settings. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 27 In the Rendering dialog.Flat Round : 60W . and click Artificial Lights. click OK.Flat Round : 60W . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . right-click Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Flat Round : 60W . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night.120V to the Pool Lights group. dialog. click Dialog). 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights. 21 In the Light Groups dialog.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . and click OK.Exterior . click New. select Exterior: Artificial only. and click Move to Group. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. under Group Options. enter Pool Lights. press and hold SHIFT. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . and select the last light. and click OK.Night view open.120V. under 3D Views. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 16 With the Exterior . under Lighting. 22 Using the same method. and click OK. for Scheme.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . verify that Pool Lights is selected. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Day.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Flat Round : 60W .

Rendering an Interior View on page 713. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. click Adjust Exposure.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. In this example. 32 Save the file. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. and click OK. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. under Image. you change the brightness of the exposure. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 30 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. enter 4. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . click Show the model.

Adding RPC People In this exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. render the views. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. define the perspective view and rendering settings.rvt. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

the person’s line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar. select RPC Female : YinYin. 2 Zoom in to the pool house.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and place the component inside the pool house. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 6 Select the figure. ■ (Rotate). under Floor Plans. Exact placement is not important. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. and on the Edit toolbar. click Component. 4 In the Type Selector. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click Modify. Adding RPC People | 715 . double-click Level 1.

on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select Cast Reflections. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Click OK 3 times. you can enable this option. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. click Edit. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 14 Save the file. click Edit/New. for Render Appearance Properties. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. under Identity Data. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Modify. under Parameters. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By default. In order to see the figure’s reflection.

click Camera. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.rvt. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.

and click Properties. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. select Section Box.The perspective view displays. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering.

double-click South.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. In order to accurately adjust the section box. in addition to the 3D view. under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 11 In the 3D view. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. select the section box. under Elevations (Building Elevations).

720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. size the box as shown.12 In the floor plan view. 14 In the 3D view. select the section box.

16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. 17 Save the file. and render the interior view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. To create a daytime view.15 Maximize the 3D view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. doors that contain windows or glass. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . and curtain walls.

select Draft. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. click Render. under 3D Views. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click Rename. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser.Night.rvt. and click OK. enter Interior . 4 In the Rendering dialog. right-click 3D View 1. 3 On the View Control Bar. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Interior: Artificial only. and click OK. 5 Click Artificial Lights.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. for Scheme. clear Pool Lights. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 7 Under Quality. for Setting. After these settings are established. under Lighting. You can specify a lower quality. you turn them off for this scene.

click 14 For Setting. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. the daylight portals can be turned on. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. 17 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. in order to turn on daylight portals. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Interior: Sun only. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . select Spring Equinox . and click OK. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. see the Revit Structure Online Help.Night. 13 In the Rendering dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For sunlit interiors. and click Render. you must create a custom setting. You create a view for the interior during the day. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view.Santa Monica. In this case. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog.9 Close the Rendering dialog. select Edit. click Copy To Custom. for Daylight Portal Options. The preset schemes are read-only.Day. right-click Interior . for Sun. For more information on daylight portals. (Show Rendering Dialog). By default they are turned off. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Region. 3pm. select Curtain Walls.

Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. click Show the model. and close the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. and on the Options Bar.18 In the Rendering dialog. enter 1. under Image. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Properties). 20 In the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. For Saturation. click Adjust Exposure. enter 10. In the next steps. select the column on the right. Click OK.

select Scale (locked proportions). 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.6. click OK. select Based on wood grain. 26 Click Update Preview. 32 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and on the Options Bar. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select High. For Width. clear Region. 29 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. 23 With the column still selected. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. select Unfinished. for Resolution. Click OK. You change the varnish setting. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. For Amount. For Rotate. 28 In the Rendering dialog. select Wood.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. under Output Settings. add a bump map to create texture. enter 90. and click Render. As size and DPI are increased. for Setting. enter 5''. 24 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the drawing area. For Bump. select the crop boundary. select Printer. click the dimensions for Size. the render time increases significantly. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 .

When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. but you can also define it in a 3D. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Usually. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. elevation. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. In a plan view. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . independent of the Revit Structure software.The rendered image displays. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output.

If you prefer to use metric values. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Views (all).■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and click the tab in the context menu. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . proceeds through the dining room. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. on the Options Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Walkthrough. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Floor Plans. and change unit formats as desired. and double-click 1st Floor. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. verify that Perspective is selected. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown.rvt.

728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Finish. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click Walkthrough 1. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 16 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 12 On the View menu. for Frame. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 14 Click . and for Height. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. for Width. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 9''. 11 Under Change. 17 Click . click the dimensions for Size. verify that Field of view is selected. If it is not. on the Options Bar. enter 1. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and select the crop boundary. select the crop boundary. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 16''. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.

The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. c_Townhouse. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. click (Element Properties). NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. press ESC. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . clear Far Clip Active.rvt. double-click 1st Floor.The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. under Floor Plans. proceed to the next exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

for Controls. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . select Path. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and drag it to the location shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 7 Click the third key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

for Model Graphics Style. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. shading with edges. under Walkthroughs. select <Shading>. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 9 To play the walkthrough.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. reducing the size of the image. click Edit Walkthrough. c_Townhouse. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. The walkthrough is recorded. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. or rendering. on the Options Bar. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. When you export the walkthrough. for Frames/sec. click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. shading. double-click Walkthrough 1. and click OK. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. enter 15. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. under Output Length. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. specifying the number of frames. and click Save. for Compressor. without opening Revit Structure 2009. If you are unsure of what option to use. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and click OK.rvt. 3 Under Format. hidden line. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs.

you learn how to add fascia.Roofs 23 In this lesson. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. shed. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and low sloped roofs. gutters. gable. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. mansard. In addition. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and soffits to the roofs that you create. In this tutorial. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. including hip. 733 . You do not need to create the work plane. In this exercise. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this lesson.

select Name. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click OK. expand Views (all). The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 5 In the Go To View dialog. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. click Ref Plane. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and double-click Level 1.rvt. click Training Files.

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. and so on). 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . click the blue square on the witness line. centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.

Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. select Chain. sketch the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 16 On the View toolbar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 13 On the Options Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.

use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the exterior face of the wall. press CTRL. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 18 Select the edge of the roof. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 21 In the Project Browser. press TAB. and select the second wall. click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Type 1). and double-click Section 1. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Next. 19 On the Tools toolbar. The roof should resemble the following illustration.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . expand Views (all).

and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click model. 26 On the View toolbar. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs .24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.

click Pick Walls. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. i_Roofs. expand Views (all). You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 3 In the Project Browser. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. expand Floor Plans. and click Yes. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. and double-click Garage Roof. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . 5 On the Options Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. sketch the roof footprint. Next. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang.rvt.

By default. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. clear Defines slope. 8 On the Options Bar. select both slope definition lines. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. and click OK. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. under Dimensions. and on the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Next. click Finish Roof. click Modify. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. 15 On the View toolbar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Press CTRL. click (Properties). (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click the model.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 14 When you see the informational dialog. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint.

you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. When you complete the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. clear Defines slope. sketch the chimney opening. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. expand Views (all). You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 3 On the Options Bar. press TAB. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click Pick Walls. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 6 Click to select all the walls.rvt. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. i_Roofs. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . Next. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 3.

click (Rectangle). 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. select Defines Slope. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 15 On the Options bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Modify. 10 On the View menu. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. select Defines Slope. 18 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Lines. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 9 Using automatic snaps. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.19 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Next. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 7 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. clear Defines Slope. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. select Defines slope. and click (Pick Lines). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. and double-click Level 2.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all).

Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click Roof Properties. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 14 Under Constraints. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. using the following illustration for guidance. and click OK. 11 To trim the first line segment. click Finish Roof. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Next. raise the roof 2' above the current level. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. select the left vertical slope definition line. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. click (Trim/Extend). 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next.

Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click Modify. click (SteeringWheels). 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof.16 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 18 On the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 17 On the View toolbar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. join the two remaining walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Roofs. Next. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 23 On the Tools toolbar.

9 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). and double-click Level 2. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. click Pick Walls. 8 On the Tools toolbar. clear Defines Slope. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. press TAB. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 6 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Floor Plans. Next. select the left vertical roof line. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). you add a slope-defining line. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . 10 To trim the first line segment.

and press ENTER. click 20 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. (SteeringWheels). expand Floor Plans. and click OK. 19 On the View toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 16 Under Constraints. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. i_Roofs. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. click Roof Properties. select Defines slope.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. expand Views (all). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all). you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.

13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . 12 On the Options Bar. Next. 7 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. add two new slope arrows. click Slope Arrow. Next. clear Defines Slope. 11 On the Design Bar. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. 9 On the Tools menu. you need to add two reference planes. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. To help locate the position of each split. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.5 On the View menu. Before you can add slope arrows. click (Pick Lines). 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify.15 to add the second slope arrow. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration.

The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. click Align Eaves. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and move the cursor to place the arrow. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click Modify. (Properties). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Slope for Specify. click Edit. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. i_Roofs. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 5 On the Options Bar. and double-click Garage Roof. and then click OK. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. expand Floor Plans. and click 19 Under Constraints. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select both slope arrows. 18 Press CTRL. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. (Properties).Begin the tail at the right reference plane. under Dimensions. enter 6'' for Rise/12". you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 20 Under Dimensions. enter 12'' for Rise/12". When you sketch a hip roof. The eave lines display with a dimension. on the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When aligning eaves.rvt. expand Views (all). 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 1 In the Project Browser. the adjacent eave heights must align. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . When eave heights differ. and click OK.

you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. 13 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof.Next. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. click Save As. click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select a method to align the eaves. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.

and double-click Level 3. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click Lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.1 In the Project Browser. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Next. expand Elevations. 6 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click North. expand Views (all). (Properties). under Constraints. click Modify. 3 Select the roof and. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. on the Options Bar. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Floor Plans. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . click Save As. click (Pick Lines). 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Modify. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.10 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Finish Roof. press TAB. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and then select Defines slope. and select the remaining three lines. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click . under Dimensions. and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click mansard roof. enter 3'' for Rise/12". (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar.

754 | Chapter 23 Roofs .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. you add a roof to a building shell. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. After you add the roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Roof. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.

6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . click (Trim/Extend). Because the walls are not continuous. 7 On the Tools toolbar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 5 In the drawing area.4 On the Options Bar. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click the section head to open the section view. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.Insulation on Metal Deck . click Roof Properties. 11 On the Design Bar. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. for Type. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs .8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. select Steel Truss . click Finish Roof.EPDM.

click (Draw Split Lines). 18 Move the cursor down. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. In the next steps. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. 16 On the Options Bar. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 .The roof has been created. and click to select it. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof.

19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs .You create a split line vertically down the center. (Add points). and select a point on the opposite roof line. 20 Using the same method. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. Next. on the Options Bar. move the cursor horizontally to the left. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section.

You modify the points individually. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. click (Modify Sub-Elements). The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. for the dimension. enter -2''. and press ENTER. exact placement of the points is not important. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.In this exercise. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . 25 Using the same method.

Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. for Elevation. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 27 Press and hold CTRL. including the interior edges of the roof regions. enter 4''. and select all of the roof edges.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. click (Modify Sub-Elements). click Modify. 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and press ENTER. 29 On the Design Bar.

click (Properties).Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. for the Thermal/Air Layer. and on the Options Bar. The entire slab is sloped. for Structure. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 36 View the results in the section view. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. click Edit. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 35 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. By making the insulation layer variable. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. select Variable. 31 Select the roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope.

on the File menu. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Open.rfa. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. Creating Fascia. Gutters. Gutters. and soffits in Revit Structure. click Training Files. and Soffits on page 762. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you create a roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to create roof fascia. 3 Press CTRL. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs . select Fascia-Built-Up. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click (Properties). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt. click Save As. gutters.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. and open Common\c_Condominium. you can easily create its fascia. 37 If you want to save your changes. Creating Fascia. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and soffits.

14 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK twice. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. and click OK. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. enter Built-up Fascia.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. Creating Gutters on page 764. click Duplicate. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. click in the Value field for Material. . and click OK. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 10 Click to place the gutter. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. c_Condominium. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction.Creating Gutters In this exercise. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. and click OK three times. click (Properties). 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.rvt. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile.

expand Views. click Pick Roofs. Creating Soffits | 765 . Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Condominium. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Soffits on page 765.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.rvt.

4 Select the roof. 8 Select the roof. 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click Finish Sketch. and double-click 3D. click Join Geometry. and then select the soffit to join them. 5 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Tools menu. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand Views (all).

9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Soffits | 767 . on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

768 .

you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. hotel rooms. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. The new group is considered nested within the host group. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. In this tutorial. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Modifying. you also simplify the modification process. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you not only simplify their placement. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. For example. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. Creating.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. the host group is also updated automatically. You mirror one instance of the group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and modify repetitive units. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. After you create a model group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and typical office layouts. 769 . By grouping objects. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. When you make changes to a nested group. all instances in the building model are updated. In this exercise. place. In another exercise. or with those working on a different project.

rvt. and double-click First Floor. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. expand Views (all). 2 Click in the drawing area. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). Creating and Placing a Group | 771 .

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 772 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . and click Create Instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. under Groups. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. 12 On the Design Bar.

click (Mirror). 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. Creating and Placing a Group | 775 .

You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and one rotated. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. one mirrored. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. as shown. click Modify. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you finish editing.rvt. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click Save. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. click Save As. Modifying a Group | 777 . press TAB to highlight the wall. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt.

). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.).3 Click (Group Member.). 8 On the Design Bar. select the element. and click member to group instance. 7 Click (Group Member.). and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. press TAB. and click to select the door. 4 Move the cursor over the door.

and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. Modifying a Group | 779 . 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 11 On the Design Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. click Door. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall.

Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. move the cursor up. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 22 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click Edit Group. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.16 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 20 On the Options Bar. In edit group mode. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

created in an earlier lesson. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. under Constraints. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.24 On the Design Bar. enter 3' 4''. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 25 Select the opening. enter 7'. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. click Modify. 28 On the group editor toolbar. click 27 For Base Offset. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Finish. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Unconnected Height. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. Nesting Groups | 781 . (Element Properties). When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. which acts as the host. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.

Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click (Add to Group). click Edit Group.rvt. select the Typical Kitchen group. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . in the Project Browser.

click Finish.6 Press TAB. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups | 783 . under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors.

such as text. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. under Floor Plans. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. you add door tags to a group. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. such as door and window tags. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . double-click First Floor.rvt.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. In the next exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.

4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Filled Region. Creating a Detail Group | 785 .3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

click to add an arc leader. and select the text note and the filled region. click Modify. as shown. 12 Enter Tile. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 16 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 14 On the Edit toolbar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. and on the Design Bar. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and click OK. click (Group).

Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. double-click Second Floor. click Modify. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Groups. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Because the detail group contains variables. 21 In the drawing area. 22 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. expand Detail. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.

Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click Tag ➤ By Category. 5 On the Design Bar. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. clear Leader. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 On the Options Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . under Floor Plans. click Modify. as shown. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area.manner that a drawing component can be added. double-click First Floor.

select Door Tags. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK.7 On the Options Bar. click (Group). Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . under Floor Plans. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. click Check None. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). for Attached Detail Group Name. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 8 In the Filter dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project. therefore. click Place Detail. and click OK. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 14 On the Options Bar.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.

explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and click Save.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. In this case. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 3 For File name. click Modify. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and expand Model. and click Open. browse to the Desktop. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. for Create new. A warning dialog displays. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. expand Groups. and click Save Group. verify that Project is selected. and click Create Instance. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. accept the default template file. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 In the New Project dialog. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. click OK. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . verify that Same as group name is selected. click Desktop. under Groups\Model.

25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project.rvt.rvt file is added as a link to the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 20 On the Options Bar. expand Revit Links. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and the link is removed. click Bind. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Use Existing. verify that Attached Details is selected only. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 24 In the message dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. select the linked Revit model. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click OK. click Remove Link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. When a group is converted to a link. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Link.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful